Inventor Tutorials

Contents

Chapter 1

Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 What are Projects? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 What Else Do Projects Control? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understand Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Examine a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Understand Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Select a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Use the Projects Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Test Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Manage Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Use Paths in Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Create a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Refine your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Use Your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Control Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 File Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Use Other Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Collaborate with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Summar y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Chapter 2

Navigation

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

i

The ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . Overview: SteeringWheels . . . . Hands-on Demo: ViewCube . . . . Switch Views . . . . . . . . . . . . The Shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . Orbit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More about Orbit . . . . . . . . . Home View . . . . . . . . . . . . Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hands-on Demo: SteeringWheels . Click and Hold . . . . . . . . . . Pan and Screen Size . . . . . . . . Orbit and Pivot Point . . . . . . . Up and Down . . . . . . . . . . . Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Walk and Look . . . . . . . . . . Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . Summar y . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3

Sketch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 20 . 22 . 23 . 23 . 23 . 24 . 24 . 25 . 25 . 26 . 27 . 27 . 28 . 28 . 28 . 29 . 29 . 30 . 30

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 33 . 34 . 36 . 37 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 43 . 44 . 45 . 46 . 47 . 48 . 49 . 51 . 52

Direct Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . Open the Sketch Profile file . . . . . . Revolve the Sketch Profile . . . . . . . Interpreting the In-Canvas Display . . Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane . Create a New Sketch . . . . . . . . . .

ii | Contents

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . Drag Geometry (continued) . . . . . Drag All the Geometry . . . . . . . Rotate a Sketched Line . . . . . . . Constrain to the Origin . . . . . . . Apply a Horizontal Constraint . . . Apply a Perpendicular Constraint . . Apply a Parallel Constraint . . . . . Apply a Dimension . . . . . . . . . Apply an Angular Dimension . . . . Show All Constraints . . . . . . . . Examine Constraint Relationships . Delete a Constraint . . . . . . . . . Summar y . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 53 . 55 . 56 . 57 . 61 . 63

Project Geometry onto the Sketch Plane . Draw the Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . Mirror the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles . . . . . . Create a Third Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude the Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Edge Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Tapped Hole . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate a Face Using the Triad . . . . . . . Summar y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 64 . 65 . 69 . 71 . 74 . 79 . 81 . 84 . 90 . 94

Parts 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Viewing and Editing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Create and Pattern a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Create a Revolved Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Use Save As to Create a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Create a Concentric Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Edit the Tapped Hole Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Mirror a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Chapter 6

Parts 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Mounting Base Profile . . . Sketch on a Part Face . . . . . . . . . . Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes . Create a Tangent Work Plane . . . . . Add the Base Mounting Holes . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 137 . 138 . 140 . 145 . 155 . 160 . 164

Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid . Create a Contact Set . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert and Constrain a Subassembly . . . . Edit a Part in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . Constrain Cylindrical Components . . . . Add the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 168 . 170 . 171 . 176 . 179 . 185 . 191 . 198 . 204

Contents | iii

Chapter 8

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . View Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . Place Centerlines and Center Marks . . Place Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . Place Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . Radial and Reference Dimensions . . . Add a Hole Note . . . . . . . . . . . . Open an Assembly Drawing . . . . . . Place a Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders . Adjust the Leader Arrowhead . . . . . Place Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 207 . 208 . 209 . 211 . 212 . 217 . 220 . 226 . 229 . 231 . 233 . 234 . 238 . 242 . 245 . 246 . 249

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 251 . 252 . 253 . 255 . 259 . 260 . 265 . 267

iLogic Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . Prepare to Add Parameters . . . . Create a Numeric Parameter . . . Create a Text Parameter . . . . . Create a True-False Parameter . . Set Parameter Filters . . . . . . . Create Feature Suppression Rule . Create Feature Activation Rule . . Create Dimension Rule . . . . . Test for Range of Values . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drawing Styles and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the project and open the Tutorial File . Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Defaults and Standards . . . . . . . Override Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . Hatch Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Hatch Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 10

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 269 . 271 . 272 . 272 . 274 . 275 . 276 . 287 . 289 . 294 . 298

The Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

iv | Contents

Interface Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . Set the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . . Finish the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch to an Environment . . . . . . . . . Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Command to Quick Access Toolbar . Use File Tabs and Edit the Part . . . . . . . Increase Screen Space . . . . . . . . . . . Create Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . Create Parts List and Annotation . . . . . Customize Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Your Own Tab Panels . . . . . . . . Export Tab Settings to XML . . . . . . . . Using Access Points through the Browser . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 12

Content

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 300 . 302 . 302 . 303 . 304 . 306 . 307 . 307 . 308 . 308 . 309 . 311 . 312 . 313 . 313 . 318 . 319 . 319 . 321 . 324 . 327 . 327 . 329

Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . Review Content Center Configuration . Place from Content Center Dialog Box . Browse in Content Center Library . . . . Place Content Manually . . . . . . . . . Create iMates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Content Manually Using iMates . . Use AutoDrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resize Standard Content . . . . . . . . . Replace Standard Content . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 13

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 331 . 332 . 333 . 335 . 335 . 336 . 338 . 340 . 343 . 344 . 345

Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 About this tutorial . . . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . Create Sketch Blocks . . . . . . Edit Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . Format Sketch Blocks . . . . . Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 347 . 348 . 349 . 352 . 355 . 359 . 367

Contents | v

Chapter 14

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the External Table . . . . . . . . Finish the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . Review Parameter Assignment Process . Open a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Parameters . . . . . . . . . . Link Your External Table . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Assign Parameters . . . . . . Modify Your Sketch Dimensions . . . . . Modify the Two Extrusions . . . . . . . Modify the Chamfer Feature . . . . . . . Modify the Hole Feature . . . . . . . . . Control Your Part with Parameters . . . Update Your Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 15

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 369 . 370 . 371 . 372 . 373 . 374 . 375 . 377 . 379 . 379 . 381 . 383 . 384 . 385 . 386 . 386

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 389 . 391 . 391 . 392 . 393 . 394 . 396 . 398 . 403 . 404 . 408 . 409 . 410 . 410 . 411 . 412 . 412

iLogic - Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start a New Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . Customize Components Before Assembly . . Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly . Add Control Parameters for Assembly . . . . Create Rules in the Assembly . . . . . . . .

vi | Contents

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iLogic - Part Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the Sample Model . . . . . . . Open a Part Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Port Size Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . Create Block and Component Type Parameters . Define a Model Rule to Control Port Visibility . Test the Block Shape Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Part Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . Test the Port Size Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Block Size Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Component Type . . . . . . . . . . . . Reorder Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Driving Rule Values . . . . . . . . . . . Update iProperties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test the iProperties Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rule Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 420 . 422 . 425 . 427 . 435 . 436

Calculate Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet . Test Your Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rule Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 17

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 448 . 454 . 458 . 459 . 460

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 477 . 479 . 479 . 480 . 481 . 482 . 484 . 484 . 486 . 486

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 489 . 491 . 492 . 494 . 496 . 499 . 500

Content Center User Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Standard and User Libraries . . . . Enable Edit of a Part Family . . . . . . . . . . Edit the Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify the Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Save Copy As to Create a Family . . . . . Edit Family Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Your Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare a Part to Publish to Content Center . Publish to Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . Verify the Published Part . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20

. . . . .

iFeatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 About this tutorial . . . . . . . Create an iFeature . . . . . . . Insert an iFeature . . . . . . . . Place an iFeature . . . . . . . . Modify the iFeature File . . . . Place iFeatures from a Family . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 19

. . . . .

Derived Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . Create a Part File . . . . . . . . . Create a Derived Part . . . . . . . Understand Derived Parts . . . . Add Features to the Derived Part Modify the Parent Part . . . . . . Update the Derived Part . . . . . Protect the Derived Part . . . . . Restore and close the parent file . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 18

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. 501 . 502 . 503 . 504 . 505 . 506 . 507 . 507 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 514

Top-down Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Contents | vii

Place and Constrain a Sketch Block Instance . Make Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset Components from the Layout Plane . . Add Features and Demonstrate Associativity . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 21

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 517 . 521 . 524 . 529 . 533

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. 536 . 538 . 538 . 540 . 542 . 543 . 544 . 545 . 545 . 547 . 547 . 549

Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 About this tutorial . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . A Word about Color . . . . Create Tweaks . . . . . . . Tweak Clamp.ipt . . . . . . Tweak the Retaining Ring . Place an Exploded View on Edit the Explosion . . . . . Associative Drawing View . Rotational Tweaks . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 23

. . . . .

Substitute Level of Detail Representations . . . . . . . . . . . 535 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open sample file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workflow Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . Derived In-place Part Method . . . . . . . Create the Derived Part . . . . . . . . . . The Substitute Representation . . . . . . . Use the Substitute Representation . . . . . Compare Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . Part-on-disk Method . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Substitute Representation . . . Guidelines for Creating a Substitute Part . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 22

. . . . .

. . . . . . a . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 551 . 552 . 554 . 556 . 560 . 561 . 563 . 564 . 568 . 568 . 571

Plastic Parts and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 About this tutorial . . . . . . . Split the Solid . . . . . . . . . Create the Grill . . . . . . . . . Create a Rule Fillet . . . . . . . Create a Rest . . . . . . . . . . Create a Lip . . . . . . . . . . Create a Body Using Split . . . Create a Segmented Lip . . . . Create a Snap Fit . . . . . . . . Add a Rule Fillet to a Feature .

viii | Contents

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 573 . 576 . 578 . 583 . 586 . 587 . 593 . 595 . 600 . 605

Create a Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Holes to a Single Body . . . . . . Insert a Toolbody Using Derive . . . . Moving Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use the Combine Command . . . . . Create a Body Using Revolve . . . . . Export the Design as Individual Parts . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 607 . 617 . 617 . 618 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 623

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 625 . 626 . 626 . 626 . 627 . 627 . 628 . 628 . 628

Studio - Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activate Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start at the Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . Watch Your Animation . . . . . . . . . . Configure the Animation . . . . . . . . . Animate Camera Viewpoint . . . . . . . . Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued) . Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued) . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 26

. . . . . . . .

Studio - Renderings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 About this tutorial . . Get Started . . . . . . Activate Studio . . . . Render . . . . . . . . Change Styles . . . . Change Appearance . Save Image . . . . . . Image Extents . . . . Summary . . . . . . .

Chapter 25

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 629 . 630 . 630 . 630 . 630 . 631 . 632 . 633 . 633 . 633

Studio - Positional Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Sample File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Three Positional Representations . . . Define the First Positional Representation . . Define the Second Positional Representation . Define the Third Positional Representation . . Activate Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduce the Timeline Length . . . . . . . . . . Create the First Animation . . . . . . . . . . . View the Keyframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Second Animation . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 635 . 636 . 637 . 638 . 640 . 642 . 642 . 643 . 643 . 644 . 645

Contents | ix

Create the Third Animation . Play the Animation . . . . . Edit the Animation . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 27

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

iCopy:

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

Use

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 645 . 646 . 647 . 647

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 649 . 650 . 654 . 658 . 659 . 663 . 665 . 667 . 671 . 673 . 674

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 676 . 678 . 680 . 680 . 685 . 688 . 688 . 690

iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . Open the Template Layout Part . . . . Create the iCopy Template Assembly . Constrain the Template Layout Part . . iCopy Author - Layout tab . . . . . . . iCopy Author - Geometry tab . . . . . iCopy Author - Parameter tab . . . . . Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . Create a Frame Part . . . . . . . . . . Complete the Assembly . . . . . . . . Constrain the Frame Part . . . . . . . Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . Place the Support Plates . . . . . . . . Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

x | Contents

. . . .

Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

Use iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Target Assembly . . . . . . . . . iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrain iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern . . . . Copy and Reuse iCopy Components . iCopy: File Names . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 29

. . . .

Skeletal Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . Open the Sample Model . . . . . . Create an Assembly . . . . . . . . Create a Frame Leg . . . . . . . . . Create a Frame Subassembly . . . . Create a Diagonal Tube . . . . . . Add a Second Horizontal Tube . . . Derived Surface from Skeleton . . . Complete the Frame Subassembly . Assembly Update . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 28

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 691 . 692 . 694 . 696 . 696 . 697 . 700 . 701 . 710 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 726 . 728 . 736

Chapter 30

Splines and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Spline Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Spline Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Lofted Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face . Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies . . . . . . . . . Create Another Split Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Split the Part to Create a Third Solid Body . . . . . Isolate the Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Offset Surface and Trim . . . . . . . . . . Create an Embossed Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Vented Opening Using Grill . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 31

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 739 . 741 . 745 . 747 . 749 . 752 . 757 . 765 . 766 . 767 . 772 . 775 . 781

Bolted Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place the Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place the Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . . . Place the Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . . . Add the Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Existing Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Bolted Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Hole Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Bolted Connection Direction . . . . . Change Configuration of Bolted Connection . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 32

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. 783 . 784 . 786 . 787 . 789 . 790 . 795 . 800 . 805 . 809 . 812 . 818

Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . . Start the Shaft Generator . . . . . . . . . . 2D and 3D Dynamic Preview . . . . . . . . Add Shaft Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Shaft Element Type . . . . . . . . . Change Dimensions of First Shaft Section . . Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section . Change Dimensions of Cone Section . . . . Change Dimensions of the Next Section . . Add and Edit the Last Shaft Section . . . . . Insert Cylindrical Bore . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 819 . 820 . 821 . 821 . 822 . 823 . 825 . 826 . 826 . 827 . 830 . 831 . 832 . 834

Contents | xi

Add Shaft to Templates Library . . . . . The Calculation Tab . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Loads and Perform Calculation . File Name Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert the Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit the Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 33

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 835 . 836 . 836 . 838 . 839 . 840 . 841 . 842

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 845 . 846 . 847 . 851 . 853 . 856 . 859 . 860 . 862

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 863 . 864 . 865 . 867 . 868 . 868 . 870 . 871 . 872 . 872 . 873 . 874 . 876

Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Select Type of Bearing . . . . . . . . Set Filter Parameters . . . . . . . . . Update the Bearing List . . . . . . . Select Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . Perform the Calculation . . . . . . .

xii | Contents

. . . . . . . .

V-Belts Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select the Belt Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Belt Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select First Pulley Type . . . . . . . . . . . Set First Pulley Position . . . . . . . . . . Select Second Pulley Type . . . . . . . . . Set Second Pulley Position . . . . . . . . . Change Pulley Properties . . . . . . . . . Specify the Second Pulley Final Position . File Name Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 35

. . . . . . . .

Spur Gears Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Sample File and Start Generator . . . . . Spur Gears Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Gear Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place the Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place the Second Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perform the Calculation and Set File Names . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 34

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 877 . 878 . 879 . 882 . 882 . 883 . 883 . 884

Insert First Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start the Generator and Specify Bearing Filter Value . Select Bearing Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place and Insert Second Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 36

Disc

Compression

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 884 . 885 . 887 . 887 . 890

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 891 . 893 . 894 . 895 . 896 . 897 . 898 . 899 . 900 . 901 . 902

Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load . . Measure the Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perform the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert the Compression Spring into the Assembly . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 38

. . . . .

Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891

About this tutorial . . . . . . . Start the Generator . . . . . . . Specify Disc Cam Placement . . Specify Disc Cam Parameters . Set Segment Values . . . . . . . Adding Segments . . . . . . . . Create Your Own Motion File . Perform the Calculation . . . . File Name Settings . . . . . . . Place Constraints . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 37

. . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 905 . 907 . 908 . 912 . 914 . 915 . 917

Weldments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . Welding Steps Overview . . . . . . . . . Weldment Feature Groups . . . . . . . . Open an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . Weld Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead . . . . . . . Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued) . Complete the Cosmetic Weld . . . . . . Weld Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complete the Weld Extent . . . . . . . . Create a 3D Fillet Weld . . . . . . . . . . Complete the 3D Fillet Weld . . . . . . . Change Weld Symbol Visibility . . . . . Add a Machining Feature . . . . . . . . Add a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 919 . 920 . 922 . 924 . 925 . 926 . 927 . 928 . 930 . 930 . 931 . 932 . 934 . 934 . 935

Contents | xiii

Add an Extrude Cut . . . . . . Complete the Sketch . . . . . . Extrude the Sketch . . . . . . . Feature Rollback . . . . . . . . Create a Weldment Drawing . . Place Drawing Views . . . . . . Complete Orthographic Views . As-machined Drawing Views . Projected Drawing Views . . . . Retrieve Weld Symbols . . . . . Add a Caterpillar . . . . . . . . Add a Caterpillar (continued) . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 39

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 936 . 937 . 937 . 939 . 940 . 940 . 941 . 942 . 943 . 944 . 945 . 946 . 948

Sheet Metal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare Your Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Open Profile . . . . . . . . . Create a Contour Flange . . . . . . . . . Complete the Contour Flange . . . . . . Place a Flange Feature . . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks . Sketch Punch Centers . . . . . . . . . . Punch Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Punch Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . Mirror the Punched Holes . . . . . . . . Create the Flat Pattern . . . . . . . . . . Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation . . . . Place a Punch Table . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 40

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 952 . 954 . 956 . 958 . 960 . 963 . 965 . 968 . 971 . 973 . 975 . 976 . 979 . 981 . 983 . 985

Sheet Metal Parts 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Lofted Flange - Create the Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993 Rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 Rip (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 Bend Order Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005 Directed Reorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 Sequential Reorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012 Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

xiv | Contents

Contour Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry . Create a Contour Roll . . . . . . . . . Create a Second Contour Roll . . . . . Add another Contour Flange . . . . . . Flatten the Rolled Tube . . . . . . . . . Unfold and Refold Feature Pair . . . . . Continue Unfold Selection . . . . . . . Partially Unfold the Tube . . . . . . . . Complete the Unfold Feature . . . . . Add a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pattern the Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Two Refold Features . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 41

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 1017 . 1019 . 1022 . 1023 . 1026 . 1028 . 1030 . 1032 . 1036 . 1040 . 1044 . 1046 . 1048 . 1050

Sheet Metal Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit the Project and Open the Sample File . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a New Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gauge and Material . . . Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and Corner Relief . Save Styles to Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Sample Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Sheet Metal Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet Metal Defaults and the Flat Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 42

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 1054 . 1056 . 1057 . 1057 . 1058 . 1060 . 1062 . 1063 . 1065 . 1069 . 1071 . 1071 . 1073

Frame Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 About this tutorial . . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . . Skeletal Model . . . . . . . . Insert Profile . . . . . . . . . Profile Orientation . . . . . . Create Profile . . . . . . . . . Place the Upper C-channel . . Orient the Upper C-channel . Place the Lower C-channels . Place the Horizontal tube . . . Place the Angle Braces . . . . Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . Notch Profile . . . . . . . . . Create Miter Joints . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 1075 . 1077 . 1077 . 1079 . 1081 . 1086 . 1087 . 1090 . 1091 . 1094 . 1097 . 1098 . 1100 . 1102

Contents | xv

Change Miter Joint Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove End Treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-create Miter Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profile Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify the Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Insert Frame Members . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Select Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Position First Vertical Member . . . . . Insert Profile - Position Remaining Vertical Members . Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Miter Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Place Other Members . . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Add Support Members . . . . . . . . . Cut Profile - Trim Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notch Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Point To Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut Profile - Trim Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 43

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 1103 . 1106 . 1108 . 1109 . 1114 . 1117 . 1118 . 1118 . 1119 . 1119 . 1121 . 1122 . 1123 . 1127 . 1129 . 1130 . 1132 . 1135 . 1138 . 1141 . 1142 . 1145 . 1147 . 1152 . 1155

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 1160 . 1161 . 1162 . 1163 . 1165 . 1166 . 1167 . 1168

DWG Data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169 About this tutorial . . . . . . Open Part and Access DWG . Import DWG . . . . . . . . . Extrude Sketch Geometry . . Create a Round . . . . . . . . Create a Shell . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi | Contents

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DWG Data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159 About this tutorial . . . . . . Open a New Part File . . . . . Import DWG Data . . . . . . Extrude Sketch Geometry . . Orient the Part . . . . . . . . Change the Part Appearance . Save the Part . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 44

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 1170 . 1171 . 1172 . 1173 . 1176 . 1181 . 1186

Chapter 45

DWG Data 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189 About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . . Create In-place Component . . . . . . . . . . Insert DWG Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Cut Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Origin Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unconstrained Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounded Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrain the Panel Part - Display Planes . . . Constrain the Panel Part - First Constraint . . . Constrain the Panel Part - Second Constraint . Constrain the Panel Part- Third Constraint . . Constrain the Cover Part - Place Constraint . . Constrain the Cover Part - Finish Placement . Final Constraint - Mate or Flush? . . . . . . . View the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 46

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 1189 . 1191 . 1192 . 1193 . 1194 . 1196 . 1199 . 1201 . 1208 . 1209 . 1210 . 1212 . 1213 . 1213 . 1214 . 1214 . 1215 . 1216 . 1219 . 1221 . 1222 . 1224

Alias to Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227 About this tutorial . . . . . . Translate the Alias Wire File . Update the Inventor Part . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 1227 . 1229 . 1234 . 1242

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Contents | xvii

xviii

1

Projects

About this tutorial

Create a project to manage files. Category

New Users

Time Required

20 minutes

1

Tutorial File Used

Start a new project file

This exercise explains the purpose and function of the Autodesk Inventor project file (*.ipj file). You do not need to complete this tutorial to complete any of the other tutorial exercises. If you are working for a company that already uses Autodesk Inventor, the chances are good the company already has one or more existing project files. If so, consult the CAD Manager or a co-worker to determine the company policy regarding project files. You may be able to set the proper project file and move on to the other exercises. This tutorial is intended to provide a "best practices" example in which a single project file controls all the searchable directories. The single master project file technique provides stability and simplicity. It also makes the data more accessible to document control systems such as Vault or Productstream. NOTE A master project file supports the use of other project files. You can create multiple project files if they are needed for prototyping or other development work. If multiple project files are required, they should be located in subfolders beneath the master project folder for stability and simplicity. Objectives ■ Learn about Project file options. ■

Create a simple project file to introduce the concepts Inventor uses to manage files.

Prerequisites ■ Inventor is installed. ■

Inventor is open in a blank document state.

■

Desire to learn how to create Project files.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 3)

2 | Chapter 1 Projects

What are Projects? Relationships exist between the various files you create with Autodesk Inventor. Projects files are text files saved in an xml format that specify the valid file locations for Autodesk Inventor data. For example, a part is usually linked to both an assembly and a drawing document. To avoid broken links or browsing for files that were not found, an understanding of Project files is essential. If you plan on using a data management solution such as Autodesk Vault or Productstream, a clean file folder structure and a single master project file can ease the transition. A single master project file provides: ■ Simplicity ■

Reduced file resolution failures

■

Increased design re-use

Autodesk Inventor actively supports two types of projects: ■ Single-user project

What are Projects? | 3

■

Vault project (If Autodesk Vault is installed)

We recommend using Autodesk Vault for users whose sharing requirements extend beyond a single-user project. Vault provides a file check-out and check-in process which prevents files from being accidentally overwritten. Autodesk Vault also contains other powerful file management tools such as easily copying an entire design. For more information on Autodesk Vault and the Autodesk Data Management Server, please refer to the Implementation Guide. This guide is delivered in .pdf format with Vault. Previous (page 1) | Next (page 4)

What Else Do Projects Control? The following list summarizes a few of the purposes and features of projects. ■ The Styles Library folder identifies where the program stores project-specific styles definitions. ■

The Templates folder identifies where the program stores file templates.

■

The Content Center Files folder identifies the root folder for the Content Library files of the project.

■

The Libraries folders store standard components.

■

The Frequently Used Subfolders create shortcuts to folders deeply nested within project locations.

You create, modify, and manage your projects using the Projects editor. You can access the Projects editor dialog box from Autodesk Inventor, or externally from the Microsoft Windows Start menu. Previous (page 3) | Next (page 4)

Understand Projects All projects contain the following parameters: ■ Workspace location (or a workgroup location) ■

Styles folder, Templates folder, and a location for Content Center Components

■

Project options

4 | Chapter 1 Projects

Projects can also contain any of the following parameters: ■ Included project file ■

Library search paths

■

Frequently used subfolders

A simple project typically contains a workspace parameter, and perhaps some subfolders and library search paths.

Previous (page 4) | Next (page 5)

Examine a Project When you install Autodesk Inventor, it creates a Default project, an iLogic Samples project, and a tutorial_files project automatically. Examine a simple project: 1 Close any open Autodesk Inventor files.

2 Click

➤ Manage ➤ Projects.

Examine a Project | 5

3 Click tutorial_files in the upper pane of the Projects editor dialog box. The contents of the file display in the lower pane of the Projects editor.

6 | Chapter 1 Projects

Previous (page 4) | Next (page 7)

Understand Workspaces In addition to the default Folder Options and Options parameters, the tutorial_files project contains only one other parameter, a workspace location. It is the simplest type of project. The workspace points to the folder where your tutorial exercise files are installed. When this project is active, the Open, Save, and Place Component dialog boxes default to this location. Only one workspace can be defined in a single-user project.

Previous (page 5) | Next (page 7)

Select a Project To select a project and make it the active project. 1 In the top pane of the Projects editor, locate the name of the project; in this case, locate the tutorial_files project. 2 Double-click tutorial_files.

Understand Workspaces | 7

A check mark appears next to the project name, indicating that it is the active project file.

In the lower pane, the workspace path is absolute and defined as "Location = (wherever you installed Autodesk Inventor)\Inventor {version}\Tutorial Files\." Previous (page 7) | Next (page 8)

Use the Projects Editor In the upper section of the Projects editor you can create, rename, and delete projects (excluding the Default and tutorial_files projects). You can also browse for existing projects. In the lower section, you can modify the parameters of the current project. Right-click to access context menus with available options, or use the commands at the bottom and side of the editor.

8 | Chapter 1 Projects

Previous (page 7) | Next (page 9)

Test Project Settings Next, test the project settings. 1 Click Done to close the Projects dialog box.

2 Click

➤ Open.

The Tutorial Files folder opens, and its files and subfolders are listed. If you hover over the Workspace entry in the Open dialog box, the tooltip indicates that the Tutorial Files folder is defined as your workspace. In addition, any libraries and subfolders that you define are also accessible here.

Test Project Settings | 9

Previous (page 8) | Next (page 11)

10 | Chapter 1 Projects

Manage Projects You use the Projects editor to manage your designs. You can create new projects as you need them, and modify existing projects when paths change or new paths are required. Place common search paths (such as library search paths) in a separate project file. You can then specify this file as the included project file in your other project files. All search paths in the included project file are added to the current project file.

Previous (page 9) | Next (page 11)

Use Paths in Projects If you are working alone, your single-user project might only contain a workspace and perhaps one or more library paths for files such as standard fasteners. NOTE If you are working as part of a team, consider using Autodesk Vault, and discuss project and file-sharing strategies with team members.

Manage Projects | 11

Use the Projects editor from Autodesk Inventor or from the Microsoft Windows Start menu to maintain and manage your projects.

Previous (page 11) | Next (page 12)

Create a Project Next, we create a project. 1 Create a folder on your local hard drive in the My Documents area. Name the new folder InventorMasterProject. 2 Locate the Tutorial Files folder in the Autodesk Inventor install directory. 3 Copy the Arbor Press folder to the InventorMasterProject folder. Notice that the Arbor Press folder contains two subfolders to further organize the data files. 4 Start Autodesk Inventor in a blank document state.

12 | Chapter 1 Projects

5 If the Projects dialog box is not currently open, close any open files, and then click

➤ Manage ➤ Projects.

6 Click New at the bottom of the dialog box. 7 Click New Single User Project, and then select Next on the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box that appears. 8 In the Name field, enter: InventorMasterProject 9 In the Project (Workspace) Folder, select Browse to navigate to the InventorMasterProject folder. 10 Select InventorMasterProject from the folder list and click OK to close the Browse For Folder dialog box. 11 Click Finish in the Inventor project wizard dialog box to create the project. Autodesk Inventor adds the new project to the list of your other projects and makes the new project the currently active project. Previous (page 11) | Next (page 13)

Refine your Project Now we will refine the project with additional settings. 1 In the lower panel of the Projects editor, select Use Style library. 2 Right-click, and choose Read-Write in the context menu. Setting the Style Library option to Read-Write enables read/write capabilities for the xml files that control styles such as dimensioning, materials, and appearances. 3 Select Libraries, and right click to access the context menu. 4 Choose Add Path in the context menu. Inventor creates a folder named Library under the InventorMasterProject folder. NOTE Library folders are used to hold standard components that do not change. You can store library files on a shared, read-only network folder to provide access for all users. Files placed in a project libraries folder cannot be edited in the context of the project file. To edit a file that resides in a defined project file library

Refine your Project | 13

location, create a project file that does not list this directory as a project library folder. If you edit a file saved in an active library location, the following message displays: Cannot modify the library file C:\My Documents\InventorMasterProject\Library\. TIP To create a separate folder for library files without limiting the edit abilities, do not use the project to define the Library. Instead, create a library folder with the required name nested under the project file folder. 5 Select Frequently Used Subfolders, and right-click to access the context menu. ■ Use Add Path to add one directory folder at a time. You can provide a unique shortcut name for each folder added. ■

Use Add Paths from File to specify another project file to add paths.

■

Use Add Paths from Directory to add all subfolders beneath the selected folder to the subfolder list.

6 Select Add Paths from Directory, and select the Arbor Press folder. 7 Click OK to close the Browse For Folder dialog box. Notice that the subfolders located beneath the Arbor Press folder appear in the Projects dialog box. 8 Click Save, and then click Done to close the Projects dialog box. NOTE In the future, press Esc to exit any Add Path operation without adding a path. Previous (page 12) | Next (page 14)

Use Your Project 1 Click

➤ Open.

Notice the Workspace is the InventorMasterProject folder. The Open dialog box shows all the subfolders contained in the root of the workspace. 2 In the upper-left panel of the Open dialog box, choose the Components folder under Frequently Used Subfolders.

14 | Chapter 1 Projects

3 The Components folder containing the arbor press part files opens. 4 To navigate back to the root of the workspace, click Workspace in the upper-left panel. Notice the Content Center Files folder is listed as an available Library in the left panel. 5 Click Cancel to close the Open dialog box. Previous (page 13) | Next (page 15)

Control Projects In the Projects Editor dialog box, use the right-click context menus in the upper pane to: ■ Rename existing projects. ■

Browse for existing projects.

■

Create new projects.

■

Delete existing projects.

You can directly edit the various parameters in the current project using context menus to add, change, and delete paths. You can also change optional settings for a project, including the number of file versions to store. Previous (page 14) | Next (page 15)

File Versions Each time you save an Autodesk Inventor file, the previous version of the file is stored in an OldVersions folder under the folder containing the file. You can specify how many versions of each file are stored in the OldVersions folder. 1 Expand Options. 2 Select Old Versions To Keep On Save. 3 Click the Edit selected item button (on the right-hand portion of the dialog box). 4 Enter the number of versions to keep.

Control Projects | 15

Once the specified number of saved versions is reached, subsequent saves eliminate the oldest version. Old versions are formatted as follows: ■ First save of existing file = file name.0001.extension. ■

Second save of existing file = file name.0002.extension.

■

Subsequent saves are named in a similar manner.

You can open an older version of a file as a read-only file. Alternatively, you can restore an old version as the current version of the file. Before the restoration of an old version, the file is saved as the most recent version in the OldVersions folder. NOTE Assembly files always use the current version of parts included in the assembly. Old versions of assembly files do not retain information on the part and subassembly versions that were in effect when you saved the assembly. Previous (page 15) | Next (page 16)

Use Other Paths In addition to a workspace, you can also define library and subfolder search paths. Search paths are examined in a specific order when opening a file (for example, an assembly) that references other files. The Using Unique File Names option determines how Autodesk Inventor behaves when searching for missing file references. ■ When this option is Yes, Autodesk Inventor searches the entire project workspace and workgroups (including subfolders) for a file with that name. If a file with that name is found, Autodesk Inventor uses it. If more than one is found, then Autodesk Inventor displays a dialog box listing all the files with that name. If the missing file name is not found, Autodesk Inventor activates the Resolve Link dialog box, where you can provide input as needed. ■

When set to No, Autodesk Inventor uses its normal search process.

16 | Chapter 1 Projects

Previous (page 15) | Next (page 17)

Collaborate with Others The primary collaborative environment for Autodesk Inventor is Autodesk Vault. Autodesk Vault is an engineering data management system that offers file security, version control, and multi-user support. By using Autodesk Vault, you have a copy of the necessary project data in your workspace. All previous versions are maintained in a vault repository, which can be either on your own computer or on a shared server. Autodesk Vault manages a collaborative work environment by tracking file versions. Other users can get the latest version of data, modify it, and check the changes back into the vault. NOTE Autodesk Inventor also continues to support two other legacy project environments: shared and semi-isolated. Discuss these project types with your system administrator or CAD Manager if your site is currently using either.

Collaborate with Others | 17

Previous (page 16) | Next (page 18)

Summary This tutorial introduced you to single-user project fundamentals including: ■ Understanding projects ■

Working with projects

■

Creating a simple project

■

Testing a new project file

If you are working with an existing collaborative team of Autodesk Inventor users, discuss their use of the legacy project types: shared and semi-isolated. We recommend that you use Autodesk Vault for team collaboration. Previous (page 17)

18 | Chapter 1 Projects

2

Navigation Tools

About this tutorial

ViewCube SteeringWheel

Navigate in 3D space. Category

New Users

Time Required

20 minutes

Tutorial File Used

19

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. Objectives ■ Demonstrate the View Cube and SteeringWheels commands using a combination of text, images, and animations. ■

Understand view tools to help navigate 3D model space efficiently.

Prerequisites ■ Know how to open files. ■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. NOTE The ViewCube and SteeringWheels appear in several Autodesk products. Some of the features and functions of these tools might not be appropriate for a particular workflow. Next (page 20)

The ViewCube

20 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

The ViewCube is an on-screen device, like Common View. In R2009 and later, the ViewCube replaces Common View. Like Common View, you click the cube corners to snap the model to isometric views, and click the faces for orthographic views. The ViewCube provides the following additional features: ■ Persists onscreen in a corner of the graphics window (you can specify which corner). ■

Can be dragged to orbit the model.

■

Provides labeled faces to indicate current view angle relative to the model world.

■

Provides clickable edges (along with the clickable corners and faces).

■

Provides a Home button to return to a user-defined base view.

■

Provides the ability to set the Front and Top views to user-defined views, thereby also redefining the other orthographic views, along with the isometric views. The redefined views are recognized by other environments or applications such as drawings or DWF.

■

In orthographic views, provides rotation arrows so you can rotate the camera in 90-degree increments, normal to the screen.

■

Provides options so that you can adjust the cube characteristics according to your preferences.

Previous (page 19) | Next (page 22)

The ViewCube | 21

Overview: SteeringWheels SteeringWheels is a convenient onscreen pallet of familiar navigation controls, as well as controls that may be new to you.

SteeringWheels provides: ■ Zoom Change the camera distance from the model. Zoom direction can be reversed relative to mouse motion. ■

Orbit Change the camera position around a pivot point.

■

Pan Translate the camera across the screen.

■

Center Redefine the orbit center point.

In addition, SteeringWheels adds some controls that are either new to Autodesk Inventor or noticeably different and improved in their behavior: ■ Walk In Perspective mode, the ability to navigate through a model, much as you might walk through passages in a building. ■

Look In Perspective mode, the ability to change your view angle without changing camera position, like pivoting a camera in any direction around a fixed point, or like moving your head from side to side or up and down.

■

Up/Down The ability to translate the camera upwards or downwards, the direction defined as normal to the Top face of the ViewCube.

■

Rewind The ability to quickly, graphically select any previous view or perspective through a series of thumbnails.

SteeringWheels follows the cursor. You can access this pallet of tools instantly, without having to move the cursor to an icon on the ribbon. Like the ViewCube, you can turn SteeringWheels on and off through the drop-down menu in the Navigate panel of the View tab. Also, like the

22 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

ViewCube, SteeringWheels has options for tailoring the tool to your preferences. Previous (page 20) | Next (page 23)

Hands-on Demo: ViewCube The remainder of the tutorial highlights certain characteristics and behaviors that may not be familiar or readily apparent. The tutorial is not intended to cover every aspect of the tools. See Help for further detailed information. Any references to default settings are based on the templates that ship with Autodesk Inventor. The ViewCube is on by default (select View ➤ Windows ➤ User Interface to turn the ViewCube on and off). The default location for the ViewCube is in the upper-right corner of the screen. The ViewCube is partially transparent when inactive. Previous (page 22) | Next (page 23)

Switch Views 1 Click an edge to switch to an edge-on view. 2 Click a face to switch to an orthographic view. 3 In an orthographic view, the Z-rotation arrows are available and provide a rotation axis normal to the screen. The axis passes through the geometric center of the model. Click an arrow to rotate the model 90 degrees. Also in orthographic view, the program shows arrows to select faces adjacent to the displayed face. Previous (page 23) | Next (page 23)

The Shadow Notice that a shadow is adjacent to the bottom face. It always moves with the bottom face to provide a constant, almost subliminal, indication of the Up direction of the model.

Hands-on Demo: ViewCube | 23

For most models, the sense of “up” is inherent in the model, or is not important. However, for some models and modeling situations, such as running a gravity-influenced motion simulation, a clear and constant sense of up and down may be useful or important. The shadow does not display when the Bottom face is visible. Previous (page 23) | Next (page 24)

Orbit You can also use the ViewCube to orbit the model. Click and drag the cube to adjust your view. Unless you are an AutoCAD user, the term “Orbit” may be new to you. Prior to Inventor 2009, all user interface labels and tooltips, along with Help documentation, used the term “Rotate.” Though Rotate is descriptive of this particular interaction with the model, it is not technically accurate. Every view of the model is actually from the viewpoint of a mobile camera, as if you are looking at the model through a camera. When you rotate a model, the camera is actually orbiting the model. Fortunately for veteran Autodesk Inventor users, the default behavior is the same as it was in previous versions. Previous (page 23) | Next (page 24)

More about Orbit In Inventor 2009, an additional, optional orbit behavior was added, known as constrained orbit. Again, unless you are an AutoCAD user, this behavior may be new to you. For the existing orbit behavior, the orbit is free about the screen axes. For constrained orbit, the orbit is constrained about the Up direction of the model. To see the difference between the two types: 1 Position the model in an isometric view with the Top face of the cube on top. 2 On the ribbon, click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Constrained

Orbit

(grouped with the Orbit command).

24 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

3 Position the cursor outside the reticle, adjacent to one of the horizontal markers. Click and drag the cursor across the screen. The orbit is constrained to the Up axis of the model.

4 Click the Free Orbit icon

, and drag the cursor as before.

Notice that the orbit axis is parallel to the screen. If you are an AutoCAD user and new to Autodesk Inventor, you may find Constrained Orbit familiar and comfortable. Previous (page 24) | Next (page 25)

Home View The Home button appears when you pause the cursor over the ViewCube. 1 Click the Home button. The viewpoint returns to a predefined location. NOTE In R2009 and later, the context menu option Isometric View (F6) has been changed to Home View. You can set any viewpoint—not just an isometric view—as the Home view. 2 Orbit the model to some arbitrary viewpoint. 3 Right-click the ViewCube, and then select Set Current View as Home ➤ Fixed Distance. The Home view is now the specified view. Previous (page 24) | Next (page 25)

Front View You can also set any viewpoint as the Front view. 1 Select any face on the ViewCube, other than the face currently labeled as Front. 2 Right-click the ViewCube, and select Set Current View as Front. This function also reorients all the other orthographic and isometric model views, For example, the Back view must always be opposite the Front view.

Home View | 25

Notice that the view does not need to be orthographic. You can specify any viewpoint to be the Front view. To pick up model view redefinitions in a drawing, ensure that the From Model option is selected in the Style and Standard Editor. To access to this option: 1 Start a new drawing. 2 On the ribbon, select Manage tab ➤ Styles and Standards panel ➤ Styles Editor. 3 In the Style and Standard Editor browser, select the relevant standard under the Standard node. 4 Select the View Preferences tab. 5 Ensure From Model is selected on the Front View Plane drop-down menu. As suggested in the introduction, drawing views created after a model view redefinition honor the redefined model view. On the other hand, model view redefinition is not backward-associative. Drawing views created before a model view is redefined do not update to match the redefinition. Close the Style and Standard editor. Previous (page 25) | Next (page 26)

Hands-on Demo: SteeringWheels Unlike the ViewCube, SteeringWheels is not on by default. On the ribbon,

click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Full Navigation Wheel. SteeringWheels follows your cursor, also by default. This feature makes the tool convenient in terms of access. If you find this behavior distracting and a little disorienting, hopefully, with a little use, you will grow accustomed and appreciate the convenience and immediacy. If you find that you really would like to use SteeringWheels, but the cursor-following behavior continues to be a distraction, you can use one of the mini wheels. More information on that option is provided later in this tutorial.

26 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

Previous (page 25) | Next (page 27)

Click and Hold Probably the most important behavior to note about SteeringWheels is that to use one of the controls, you must click and hold the mouse button. The control is only active while you hold the mouse button. Click and hold Pan , then drag the cursor across the screen. Release the button and the control automatically ends. The advantage with this behavior is that you do not need any extra motions (like pressing Esc, bringing up a context menu, or pressing the command again) to end the command. Previous (page 26) | Next (page 27)

Pan and Screen Size Another interesting and convenient behavior that affects some of the controls is that cursor movement is not limited by screen size. This is easiest to demonstrate with the Pan control. To see this: 1 Click and hold Zoom, and then draw the mouse towards you to zoom in close on the model. 2 Click and hold Pan, and then drag the cursor across the screen. Notice that the cursor leaves the screen, and then instantly appears on the opposite side. You can pan more with one hand motion before you have to reposition your hand on the mouse pad. The limiting factor is the mouse pad and cursor speed or acceleration, not the screen size. While this may seem insignificant, it all adds up. This feature may take a little getting used to when you are used to the Pan cursor stopping against the edge of the screen. Previous (page 27) | Next (page 28)

Click and Hold | 27

Orbit and Pivot Point As mentioned earlier, the actual behavior of the Orbit control is the same as earlier releases, as long as you selected Free Orbit on the ribbon. 1 Click and hold Orbit, and then drag the cursor. If Constrained Orbit is selected, then the Orbit control honors that setting. Notice that a Pivot indicator appears on screen as you orbit. The indicator provides positive feedback as to the orbit center point location. You can modify the pivot point and snap to model edges and vertices. 2 Press and hold Center, select a vertex, and then release the mouse button. The orbit center point is now that vertex. Previous (page 27) | Next (page 28)

Up and Down Just as it sounds, you can use the Up/Down control to translate the camera up and down. Up/Down translates the camera along the top/bottom axis. Previous (page 28) | Next (page 28)

Rewind If you have ever wanted to save and quickly access views in a part document, try using the Rewind control. 1 Press and hold the Rewind control. A set of thumbnails appear, almost like a film strip, showing you a selectable history of model views. 2 Drag the cursor to the left across the thumbnails. The model view seamlessly animates back through the preceding views. 3 Release the mouse button to select a view. Notice that the selected view can be any ‘intermediate’ view, not just the views shown in the thumbnails. Previous views are stored only for that session. Previous (page 28) | Next (page 29)

28 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

Walk and Look The Walk and Look controls work especially well when used in conjunction with each other. The controls only function when in Perspective mode. If you are in Orthographic mode, when you click either control, the camera automatically switches to Perspective mode. Before proceeding with the following steps, right-click the wheel and select Options. Clear the checkmark next to Walk Tool - Constrain movement to ground plane. Click OK. 1 Orient the model as shown. Press and hold Walk. Move the mouse forward, and the camera moves through the model. Move the mouse to the side, and the camera moves laterally. Release the mouse button. The walk speed is proportional to the cursor distance from walk origin indicator. 2 Press and hold Look. Move the mouse, and the camera pivots around a fixed point in that direction. 3 Now use the controls in conjunction. Press Walk to move through the model, then press Look to turn and look down the next “walk path.” Use the Walk control again to move down that line of sight. Previous (page 28) | Next (page 29)

Other Features If you have multiple windows open, SteeringWheels passes seamlessly from window to window. ■ As an alternative to right-clicking to bring up the SteeringWheel context menu, you can click the context menu button to bring up the menu.

Walk and Look | 29

■

To switch the display of SteeringWheels on and off, press Ctrl + W.

■

To dismiss SteeringWheels, click the x at the top right of the tool.

Previous (page 29) | Next (page 30)

Mini Wheels The full version of SteeringWheels displays by default, but you can specify other full-size versions of SteeringWheels as well as miniature versions of each wheel. To experiment with these versions, right-click the SteeringWheels tool, and select a version from the menu. For example, select Mini View Object Wheel to see a small version of the full SteeringWheels. Previous (page 29) | Next (page 30)

Summary In this tutorial, you learned how to: ■ Use the ViewCube to switch defined views. ■

Use the ViewCube to orbit a model.

■

Use the ViewCube to redefine named views.

■

Use the ViewCube to return to a home view.

■

Use SteeringWheels to orbit a model and redefine the orbit pivot point.

30 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

■

Rewind to and select previous viewpoints.

■

Navigate model space using the Walk and Look commands.

■

Access alternative SteeringWheels.

Check Help for further detailed information. Previous (page 30)

Summary | 31

32

Sketch Constraints

3

About this tutorial

Explore the impact of geometric and dimensional constraints on a simple sketch. Category

New Users

Time Required

25 minutes

33

Tutorial File Used

sk1.ipt

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. Understand sketch constraints to work effectively with Autodesk Inventor. Objectives ■ Apply constraints. ■

Establish relationships between geometry.

■

View and delete constraints.

Prerequisites ■ Know how to set the , navigate the model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding. ■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 34)

Get Started 1 Double-click Sketch1 in the browser to open the sketch for edit. 2 To orient the view, click View Face from the navigation toolbar, and click Sketch1 in the browser so the sketch is parallel to the screen.

34 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

The sketch used in this tutorial contains four straight line segments drawn so the line endpoints are constrained to be coincident. Otherwise, the geometry is unconstrained.

Get Started | 35

Previous (page 33) | Next (page 36)

Drag Geometry Move the endpoint of one of the lines: 1 Move your mouse cursor over the top-most endpoint. 2 When it highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and then drag the point up and toward the right. 3 Release the mouse button to select the new position.

36 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Two line segments lengthen to adjust to the new position specified for the endpoint. Previous (page 34) | Next (page 37)

Drag Geometry (continued) Move one of the lines: 1 Move your mouse cursor over the left-most line. 2 When it highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and then drag the line toward the left.

Drag Geometry (continued) | 37

3 Release the mouse button to select the new position. Two line segments lengthen to adjust to the new position while the selected segment becomes shorter. Previous (page 36) | Next (page 38)

Drag All the Geometry Move all the lines: 1 Move your mouse cursor to the left and below the sketch geometry. 2 Click and drag a selection window to the upper-right around the geometry. Release the mouse button to select the geometry.

38 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

3 Move your mouse cursor over one of the lines. 4 When the line highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and then drag up and toward the right. 5 Release the mouse button to select the new position.

Drag All the Geometry | 39

The program repositions all the selected geometry without changing the size or angle of any of the line segments. 6 Click in your graphic window to cancel the selection of all four line segments before proceeding to the next step. Previous (page 37) | Next (page 41)

40 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Rotate a Sketched Line Rotate one of the lines:

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate. 2 Select the left-most line in the sketch. 3 Right-click and select Continue. 4 Select the lower endpoint of the line segment as your center point. This is the pivot point for the rotation. 5 Click No on the dialog box which prompts you if you want to remove constraints. If you click Yes, the constraints on the line are deleted and the line rotates independent of the other geometry. 6 Drag the displayed handle to rotate the line segment. NOTE You can also enter a value in the Angle field of the dialog box and click Apply to view the change.

Notice that one end of the line remains fixed while the program dynamically repositions the other. The attached segment also adjusts length and angle to stay attached. 7 Click to select a new angle for your line segment and click Done to close the Rotate dialog box.

Rotate a Sketched Line | 41

Previous (page 38) | Next (page 42)

Constrain to the Origin 1 Right-click the Origin folder in the browser, and select Expand All Children to see the browser nodes you use to select the origin geometry when it is not displayed. 2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Project

Geometry. 3 Select the browser node Center Point to include the origin point as a point in your sketch. 4 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Coincident Constraint.

5 Select the lower endpoint of the left-most line, and then the projected origin point.

42 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Notice that two line segments adjust their length and angle to allow the endpoint to become coincident with the origin point. NOTE Do not be concerned if the shape of your geometry does not exactly match the illustrations. Previous (page 41) | Next (page 43)

Apply a Horizontal Constraint The set of geometric constraints contains both a horizontal and vertical constraint. You can apply to lines to make them horizontal or vertical relative to the sketch X or Y orientation.

1 Select the Horizontal Constraint command. 2 Select the lower line of the sketch. NOTE Ensure that you select the line and not the line midpoint.

Notice that the lower segment becomes horizontal while remaining coincident to the origin.

Apply a Horizontal Constraint | 43

Previous (page 42) | Next (page 44)

Apply a Perpendicular Constraint The set of geometric constraints contains a perpendicular constraint which makes one line perpendicular to another.

1 Select the Perpendicular Constraint command. 2 Select the right-most line of the sketch. 3 Select the (now horizontal) lower line of the sketch.

The line segment becomes perpendicular to the lower segment. NOTE If a design change later requires you to rotate your sketch, it is often more appropriate to make one line perpendicular to another rather than using the horizontal or vertical constraints (which prevent rotation). Previous (page 43) | Next (page 45)

44 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Apply a Parallel Constraint The set of geometric constraints contains a parallel constraint which makes one line parallel to another.

1 Select the Parallel Constraint command. 2 Select the right-most line of the sketch. 3 Select the left-most line of the sketch.

Although the left line segment becomes parallel to the right line segment, the length of the upper and lower lines changed. Next, you apply dimensions which constrain your geometry to a specific size. Previous (page 44) | Next (page 46)

Apply a Parallel Constraint | 45

Apply a Dimension Use the General Dimension command in the sketch environment to place linear and angular dimensions. What you select determines what type of dimension you obtain. If you want to dimension the length of a line, you can select the line. If you want to place a dimension between two pieces of sketch geometry, you can select each piece of geometry. 1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension.

2 Select the right-most line of the sketch. 3 Select the left-most line of the sketch. 4 Click to place the dimension. 5 Click the dimension to change the value. 6 Enter a new value of 4 in, and click the check mark to apply the new value.

46 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

TIP You can set an application option so you can edit dimensions during placement. Each time you click to place a dimension, the Edit Dimension dialog box appears automatically and you can specify the actual dimension or equation. The option is called Edit dimension when created and is located on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box. Previous (page 45) | Next (page 47)

Apply an Angular Dimension The Dimension command is still active. Place an angle dimension between the right-most vertical line and the top line: 1 Select the right-most line of the sketch. 2 Select the top-most line of the sketch. 3 Click between the lines to place the dimension. 4 Click the dimension to change the value. 5 Enter a new value of 60 deg, and click the check mark to apply the new value.

Apply an Angular Dimension | 47

NOTE You can also delete dimensions. With no command active, right-click the dimension and select Delete from the context menu. Alternatively, select the dimension and then press the Delete key. In the next steps, you explore which constraints you applied and ways to delete constraints that you no longer need. Previous (page 46) | Next (page 48)

Show All Constraints Knowing what constraints the program applies to which pieces of geometry is critical to predictable sketch behavior. 1 Right-click in an empty area of your sketch. 2 Select Done from the context menu to terminate the placement of dimensions. 3 Right-click again in an empty area of your sketch. 4 Now select Show All Constraints from the context menu.

48 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Notice that icons appear near each piece of geometry with indications of the applied constraints. Previous (page 47) | Next (page 49)

Examine Constraint Relationships The icons represent the constraints that you applied to the geometry or that the system applied when you created the geometry.

Examine Constraint Relationships | 49

Pause your mouse over the perpendicular constraint icon near the bottom of the right-most vertical line segment.

Notice that the lines which are perpendicular highlight, as does the perpendicular constraint icon. Using this technique you can understand the network of constraints that govern the behavior of your sketch. Previous (page 48) | Next (page 51)

50 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Delete a Constraint By right-clicking a displayed constraint icon, you can delete the constraint. 1 Right-click the perpendicular constraint icon near the bottom of the right-most vertical line segment. 2 Select Delete to remove the perpendicular constraint between this line and the horizontal lower line segment. 3 Click and drag the top-most endpoint to see how the geometry now behaves.

Delete a Constraint | 51

Finally, right-click an empty area of your sketch, and select Hide All Constraints to make the constraint icons invisible. Previous (page 49) | Next (page 52)

Summary In this tutorial, you explored: ■ Various ways that under-constrained geometry behaves during dynamic dragging. ■

The application of various geometric constraints such as: coincident, horizontal, perpendicular, and parallel.

■

The application of dimensional constraints.

■

The effect of constraints on geometry size and position.

■

Access to a display of constraint relationships to their geometries.

■

Deleting constraints.

Previous (page 51)

52 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Direct Manipulation

4

About this tutorial

Category

New Users

Time Required

30 minutes

Tutorial File Used

Sliding-pin Hanger.ipt

53

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. Maximize your skill using Direct Manipulation to interact with models. Direct Manipulation is a new user interface where you interact and modify a model while viewing the changes in real time. The resulting interaction is dynamic, visual, and predictable. You focus on the geometry in an in-canvas display instead of interacting with user interface elements such as the ribbon, browser, and a dialog box. Objectives ■ Identify the various graphical elements of the Direct Manipulation in-canvas display. ■

Rotate and extrude sketch profiles using manipulators.

■

Offset a work plane using a distance arrow.

■

Create a sketch using the mini-toolbar.

■

Use the Dynamic Input Heads-Up Display (HUD) to construct accurate sketch geometry and have it automatically dimensioned.

■

Recognize the differences between Join, Cut, and Intersect graphical previews.

■

Create an edge fillet.

■

Construct a tapped hole.

■

Rotate an existing face.

Prerequisites ■ See the Help topics "Getting Started", "Direct Manipulation", and “Dynamic Input” for further information. System Settings On the ribbon Tools tab, Options panel, select Application Options and click the Sketch tab to enable the following settings: ■ Edit dimension when created ■

Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit

NOTE The Grid lines display is not enabled in any of the sketch environment images in this tutorial.

54 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 55)

Open the Sketch Profile file 1

Click Get Started tab ➤ Launch panel ➤ Open on the ribbon. Select Sliding-pin Hanger.ipt from the file list in the Open dialog box.

2 Click OK. 3 The Sliding-pin Hanger sketch profile appears in the isometric Home View (isometric orientation) as shown. Press F6 to restore the Home View if your view is different from the image.

Take a moment to study the Model browser at the left side of the graphics window. It displays both the part origin and the sole feature in the part, Sketch1. Click the + button to the left of the Origin folder name to expand the item. Notice that the center point of the part (X=0, Y=0, Z=0), the origin

Open the Sketch Profile file | 55

planes, and origin axes are displayed in the browser. Each of the browser elements highlights in the graphics window as you move your cursor over them. NOTE The Origin elements appear dimmed in the browser. Although their visibility is turned off by default, they are still active. You can turn on the visibility by right-clicking over any one of them and activating the corresponding Visibility check box in the pop-up context menu. It is not necessary to turn them on for this exercise, however. Previous (page 53) | Next (page 56)

Revolve the Sketch Profile The Revolve command creates a feature by revolving one or more sketch profiles about an axis through any angle measuring between zero and 360°. The axis of revolution can be part of the profile or offset from it. The profile and axis must be coplanar.

1

Click Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Revolve on the ribbon, or press R to invoke the Revolve command. After invoking the Revolve command, both the Direct Manipulation in-canvas display and the title bar of the Revolve dialog box appear in the graphics window. The dialog box is in a collapsed state, but can be expanded by clicking the down arrow near the top of the dialog box. For this tutorial, we use the Direct Manipulation in-canvas display and mini-toolbar to revolve the sketch profile rather than use the dialog box options.

2 Observe that the sketch profile automatically highlighted when you invoked the Revolve command because it is the only sketch in the part file. Note also that the axis button in the mini-toolbar is highlighted . This indicates that the revolution axis selection is not yet satisfied. 3 Click to select the long horizontal axis of the profile.

56 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Previous (page 55) | Next (page 57)

Interpreting the In-Canvas Display After selecting the axis of revolution, the in-canvas display appears in the graphics window. Take a moment to examine the various elements of the in-canvas display.

Interpreting the In-Canvas Display | 57

The value input box reports that a full 360° revolution will be performed around the sketch axis you selected. It is the default condition for the Revolve command and the graphical preview on your display screen reflects that. However, you can enter any angular value in the value input box to create a revolution other than a full 360°. As an alternative to entering an explicit angular value in the value input box, you can also click the gold rotation arrow manipulator. Then dynamically drag the sketch profile around the axis of revolution. 1 Try it now. Click the rotation arrow manipulator and drag the profile around the axis. First drag in one direction, and then try dragging in the opposite direction. As you drag the rotation arrow, observe the changing

58 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

angular values displaying in the value input box. Note also that the graphical preview updates in real time to show the results of the Revolve operation. 2 When you are finished experimenting with dynamic drag, direct your attention to the Revolve mini-toolbar in the in-canvas display. 3 Starting at the upper-left, let us examine each of the buttons. ■

The grip button lets you easily move the mini-toolbar to a different screen location.

■

The fly-out arrow on the Extents button offers several termination options: ■ Angle lets you revolve the sketch profile around the axis at any angle. ■

To next face/body lets you revolve to an existing face or body of a multi-body part.

■

To selected face/plane lets you revolve to an existing part face, work plane, or work point.

■

Between two faces/planes lets you select beginning and ending faces or work planes on which to terminate the revolution.

■

Full performs a full 360° of revolution around the sketch axis.

■

Click the Profile button and then select the sketch to revolve. (Remember that the very first sketch in a new part file is selected automatically.)

■

Click the Axis button which to revolve the profile.

■

The Solid button in a multi-body part.

■

The Solid output button a solid or a surface object.

and then select the axis about

selects the participating solid body

lets you revolve a profile into

Interpreting the In-Canvas Display | 59

■

The Join button adds the volume created by the revolved feature to another feature or body. We will explore the Cut and Intersect options a bit later in this tutorial.

■

The fly-out arrow on the Direction button displays the direction options available: ■ Direction 1 revolves the sketch profile in the positive direction (towards you). ■

Direction 2 revolves the sketch profile in the negative direction (away from you).

■

Symmetric revolves the sketch profile in both directions with equal angular values.

■

Asymmetric revolves the sketch profile in both directions with different angular values.

■

Click the Ok button complete the revolution.

to finish the Revolve command and

■

The Cancel button revolution is performed.

cancels the Revolve command. No

■

The Mini-Toolbar Options button offers two options. You can pin the mini-toolbar so that it remains stationary in the graphics window and/or use the Auto Fade option to enable or disable the mini-toolbar display.

4 Now, select the Full option in the Extents button flyout and click the green Ok button to complete the Revolve command. 5 Observe that the Revolution1 feature was added to the Model browser. Click the + button to the left of the feature name to expand the item. The feature has one child - the sketch from which it was created. 6 Move your cursor over both the Revolution1 feature name and Sketch1 in the browser. The corresponding items highlight in the graphics window as you do so.

60 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Previous (page 56) | Next (page 61)

Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane In the next part of the tutorial, you create a work plane which is offset from the default XY plane of the part origin. The work plane is the base for a new sketch.

1

Click the down arrow of the Model tab ➤ Work Features panel ➤ Plane command on the ribbon. Then select Offset from

Plane from the Plane drop-down menu

.

2 Once again, direct your attention to the Model browser at the side of the graphics window. The Origin folder should still be in an expanded state. If not, click the + button to expand the part Origin folder. 3 As you did previously, move your cursor over the YZ Plane, the XZ Plane, and the XY Plane in the browser. As each Origin plane

Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane | 61

highlights in the graphics window, make a point of identifying which browser element corresponds to which origin plane in the graphics window. 4 Click the XY Plane. Next, you create a work plane parallel to the default XY plane (highlighted in blue), but at a specified distance. 5 Click the gold distance arrow manipulator and drag the parallel work plane in a positive direction (towards you) approximately 38 mm. Alternatively, you can directly enter 38 in the value input box. It is not necessary to include the mm if you choose this method. 6 Click the green Ok button to create the parallel offset work plane and end the command.

The new feature, Work Plane1, is added to the Model browser.

62 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Previous (page 57) | Next (page 63)

Create a New Sketch We will now create a sketch on the work plane. In a later step, this sketch is mirrored across the X axis of the part. It is used to cut away, or extrude, portions of material from the cylindrical feature of the part. 1 Click any one of the four edges of the work plane. 2 When the mini-toolbar appears, click the second button on the right labeled with the tooltip Create Sketch.

Create a New Sketch | 63

3 The view automatically rotates parallel to the XY plane. This is because the Look at sketch plane on sketch creation option on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is active.

The new feature, Sketch2, is added to the Model browser. Previous (page 61) | Next (page 64)

Project Geometry onto the Sketch Plane The Project Geometry command projects edges, vertices, work features, loops, and curves from existing sketches or part geometry onto the current sketch plane. It can also be used to project part origin planes and axes.

1

On the ribbon, click the Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Project Geometry button.

2 Select the top horizontal line and the arc representing the spherical radius to project onto the sketch plane. Select the X axis from the

64 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

expanded Origin folder in the Model browser, as well.

3 After selecting the three elements, right-click in the graphics window and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to end the Project Geometry command. Alternatively, you can also press the Esc key on your keyboard. Previous (page 63) | Next (page 65)

Draw the Sketch Geometry 1

Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line on the ribbon, or press L to invoke the Line command. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select Line at the top of the marking menu.

2 Left-click the point shown to begin the first point of the line. A green dot appears to indicate that you have selected the precise endpoint of the projected line. The Heads-Up Display (HUD) Pointer Input displays

Draw the Sketch Geometry | 65

the line starting coordinates as X = -25 mm, Y = 25 mm.

3 Move your cursor to the left (180°). End the first line segment by clicking where the horizontal line intersects with the start of the spherical radius. Do not be concerned with the displayed value in the value input box.

4 The first sketch line is now complete. The Line command can also be used to draw an arc radius. For the starting point of the arc, click the endpoint of the line you just drew. Press and hold the left mouse button

66 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

and drag your cursor to trace over a portion of the spherical radius.

5 The length of the arc segment is not important. Drag your cursor just enough to approximate what you see in the image. Be sure to keep your cursor on the spherical radius to ensure that the arc ending point is coincident with the projected geometry. (A yellow dot at the end of the cursor and a coincident constraint symbol appear when you are coincident with the sketch geometry.) Click to set the ending point of the arc. 6 You now use the Dynamic Input Heads-Up Display (HUD) to sketch another line with a precise distance and angle. Still in the Line command, pick the ending point of the arc you just completed and move your cursor to the right. Two value input boxes appear near your cursor indicating the length (distance) and angle of the sketch line under construction. Notice that the first value input box is highlighted and awaits your input. Enter 60 in the box for the line length and press the Tab key to shift the input focus to the second value input box. Enter 0 for the line angle and press the Tab key again. 7 Observe the small lock icon within each value input box. They indicate that the values you entered are locked (constrained) for both the distance and angle of the line. Note also the two parallelism glyphs indicating

Draw the Sketch Geometry | 67

that the two sketch lines are exactly parallel.

8 Press Enter to finish drawing the line. The dimensional values, called persistent dimensions, are created and placed when Dynamic Input is used to define sketch geometry. 9 Next, draw the final line segment back to the point at which you started. When the green dot appears, click to complete the segment and close the profile. 10 Finally, right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu, or press the Esc key, to exit the Line command. We will now create a vertical dimension to specify the width of the profile.

11

Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension on the ribbon, or press D to invoke the Dimension command. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select General Dimension from the marking menu.

12 Select the two line endpoints shown in the image. (The endpoints appear as red dots when you place your cursor over them.) Move your cursor to the left and click to place the dimension.

68 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

13 Enter 9 in the Edit Dimension text box. Click the green arrow (or press Enter) to create the dimension.

14 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to exit the Dimension command. Previous (page 64) | Next (page 69)

Mirror the Sketch Before making a mirror image of the sketch, turn off the visibility of the work plane. There are two ways to do it: ■ Right-click any one of the four edges of the work plane and clear the check mark in theVisibility marking menu node. ■

Or, right-click Work Plane1 in the Model browser and clear the Visibility check mark.

Your display screen should look like the following image.

NOTE The 60mm dimension has been moved and the angular dimension deleted in the image to provide clarity.

Mirror the Sketch | 69

You are now ready to mirror your new sketch about the X axis of the part.

1

Click Sketch tab ➤ Pattern panel ➤ Mirror on the ribbon. The Mirror dialog box appears with the Select button active. Now pick two diagonal points on the screen to enclose the sketch profile completely within the Mirror window.

2 Move your cursor to the upper left and outside the sketch to pick the first point. Next, move your cursor in a diagonal direction to the lower right to pick the second point. As you move your cursor, the window graphically previews to help you determine the required extents of the Mirror window.

3 Click the Mirror line button in the Mirror dialog box and select the X axis which you projected in a previous step. 4 Click the Apply button in the Mirror dialog box to preview the results of the mirror operation.

70 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

5 Click the Done button to mirror the sketch, close the Mirror dialog box, and exit the Mirror command.

6

Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch on the ribbon to finish the sketch and exit the sketch environment. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select Finish Sketch from the marking menu.

7 The model rotates automatically into the Home view when you finish the sketch. If not, press function key F6 to rotate the view. Previous (page 65) | Next (page 71)

Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles The Extrude command creates a feature by adding depth to an open or closed sketch profile. You specify the direction, depth, taper angle, and termination method for the extrusion. You now perform an extrude operation with a Cut that uses the two sketch profiles to remove material from the cylindrical portion of the part.

1

Click Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude on the ribbon, or press E to invoke the Extrude command. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select Extrude from the marking menu.

2 Select the two sketch profiles.

Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles | 71

3 After selecting the profiles, the in-canvas display appears in the graphics window. The default option for the Extrude command is to perform a Join operation. The graphical preview appearing on the screen displays in green for a Join.

4 Click the flyout arrow on the Operation button and select the Cut option

.

5 Next, click the flyout arrow on the Direction button and select the Direction 2 option , if not already active. Observe that the graphical preview changes color from green to red to indicate a Cut operation. Note also that the gold distance arrow manipulator has reversed position and now points in a negative direction into the screen. 6 Take a moment now and try dragging the distance arrow backward and forward over the object. The red graphical preview shows you the material to be removed during a Cut operation.

72 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

NOTE As an experiment, click the flyout arrow on the Operation button and select the Intersect option . An Intersect operation calculates the shared volumes of two or more intersecting objects and graphically previews in blue. After previewing the intersections, click the flyout arrow on the Operation button and select Cut once again.

7 Next, click the flyout arrow on the Extents button to display the termination options. Use ■ Distance to extrude a sketch profile with a numeric value which you enter in the value input box. It is the default option. ■

To next face/body extrudes to the next part face or solid body encountered in the direction of the extrusion.

■

To selected face/point extrudes to an existing part face, work plane, or work point.

■

Between two faces/plane selects beginning and ending faces or work planes on which to terminate the extrusion.

■

Through All performs a Join, Cut, or Intersect operation through the entire part.

8 Now, select the Through All option in the Extents button flyout and click the green Ok button to complete the Extrude command. The new feature, Extrusion1, is added to the Model browser.

Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles | 73

Previous (page 69) | Next (page 74)

Create a Third Sketch We now create a third sketch to draw and dimension a rectangle. The rectangle is then extruded with a cut to produce a rectangular-shaped opening through the part. 1 Click the flattened top face of the part. 2 The Direct Manipulation mini-toolbar appears and, starting from the left, displays three buttons offering the following commands: ■ Edit Extrude ■

Edit Sketch

■

Create Sketch

74 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

3 Select the third button, Create Sketch.

4 The view automatically rotates parallel to the XY plane. This is because the Look at sketch plane on sketch creation option on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is active. 5 The edges of the selected face are automatically projected. The Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit option on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is also active.

6

Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Rectangle on the ribbon and select Rectangle Two Point from the drop-down menu. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select Two Point Rectangle from the marking menu.

7 Pick the approximate point shown in the image to place the lower-right corner of the rectangle. Do not be concerned with the values displayed

Create a Third Sketch | 75

in the Pointer Input fields.

. 8 Move your cursor to the upper left to activate the rectangle horizontal and vertical value input boxes. The current input focus is in the value input field representing the horizontal dimension. Enter 50 and press Tab. The lock icon indicates that the horizontal dimension of the rectangle is fully constrained. 9 Input focus is now shifted to the second value input field representing the vertical dimension. Enter 25 and press Tab. 10 Press Enter to draw and dimension the rectangle. The rectangle is fully dimensioned because Dynamic Input with persistent dimensions was

76 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

used to input the dimensional values.

11 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to exit the Two Point Rectangle command. NOTE To move a sketch dimension to a new location, select the dimension, and press and hold the left mouse button as you drag the dimension. Release the mouse button when the dimension is placed to your satisfaction. The new feature, Sketch3, is added to the Model browser. We now create a single vertical dimension to center the rectangle on the flattened face.

12

Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension on the ribbon, or press D to invoke the Dimension command. Remember that you can also select General Dimension from the marking menu.

13 Select the two line endpoints shown in the image. Move your cursor to the left and click to place the dimension.

Create a Third Sketch | 77

14 Enter 6.71 in the Edit Dimension text box. Click the green arrow (or press Enter) to create the dimension.

15 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu.

16

Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch on the ribbon, or select Finish Sketch from the marking menu, to finish the sketch and exit the sketch environment.

17 The model rotates automatically into the Home view when you finish the sketch. If not, press function key F6 to rotate the view. Previous (page 71) | Next (page 79)

78 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Extrude the Rectangle Rather than use the Extrude command from the ribbon, keyboard, or marking menu, Direct Manipulation provides another method to create an extrusion. 1 Select any one of the four lines comprising the sketched rectangle to display the Sketch mini-toolbar.

2 Starting from the left, the Sketch mini-toolbar offers the following four commands: ■ Extrude ■

Revolve

■

Hole

■

Edit Sketch

Extrude the Rectangle | 79

3 Click the Extrude button and select the rectangle as the profile to extrude. Be sure to pick inside the rectangle.

4 When the Extrude mini-toolbar appears, click the flyout arrow on the Operation button and select the Cut option

.

5 Now, select the Through All option in the Extents button flyout and click the green Ok button to complete the Extrude command. The new feature, Extrusion2, is added to the Model browser.

80 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Previous (page 74) | Next (page 81)

Create an Edge Fillet Fillets and rounds are placed features that round off or cap interior or exterior corners or features of a part. The Fillet command creates the following types of fillets: ■ Edge fillets are created based on selected edges. The fillets can be of constant or variable-radius, of different sizes, and of different continuity (tangent or smooth G2). They can all be created in a single operation. All fillets and rounds created in a single operation become a single feature. ■

Face fillets are created between two faces or face sets. The faces need not share an edge. Any small edges and irregular geometry are blended over by the fillet.

■

Full round fillets are variable-radius fillets that are tangent to three adjacent faces or face sets. The center face set is replaced by a variable-radius fillet.

Create an Edge Fillet | 81

We now create a simple edge fillet using Direct Manipulation. 1 Click the circular edge of the large diameter of the part.

2 The mini-toolbar appears offering both Fillet (first button) and Chamfer (second button) command options. 3 Click the Fillet button and the Fillet mini-toolbar appears.

82 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

NOTE While it is beyond the scope of this exercise to describe each of the mini-toolbar components, you are encouraged to review the Fillet topic in the Inventor Help. 4 For the purpose of this tutorial, we need only consider the following four components of the mini-toolbar: ■ Value input box - used to enter a fillet radius in the value input field. ■

Ok button - indicated by a green check mark, the Ok button creates the fillet and terminates the command.

■

Apply button - indicated by a green '+', the Apply button lets you apply one or more edge fillets without exiting the Fillet command.

■

Cancel button - indicated by a red 'X', the Cancel button cancels the Fillet command. No fillets are created.

5 Try dragging the gold distance arrow manipulator forward and backward over the circular edge. Observe how the fillet radius increases and decreases in real time.

Create an Edge Fillet | 83

6 Drag the manipulator until 3.250 mm appears in the value input box, or enter the value 3.25 from the keyboard.

7 Click the Ok button to create the fillet and exit the command. The new feature, Fillet1 is added to the Model browser. Previous (page 79) | Next (page 84)

Create a Tapped Hole 1

Click Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Hole on the ribbon, or press H to invoke the Hole command. You can also select the Hole

84 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

command from the marking menu. The Hole dialog box appears in its collapsed state in the graphics window. 2 Select the top face at the rear of the part. The Hole mini-toolbar appears in the graphics window. If the mini-toolbar obscures the pick location on the top face of the model, select the mini-toolbar by the grip button just to the left of the value input box, and move it to a

different location. 3 Look closely at the point you picked on the top face. The ring manipulator around the center of the hole represents the hole diameter. Click the ring with your mouse and it will turn gold in color. Try dragging the gold ring manipulator to increase and decrease the diameter of the hole.

Create a Tapped Hole | 85

NOTE You may need to zoom up your display a bit to make the manipulators easier to select. 4 The sphere manipulator at the center of the pick point represents the center location of the hole. Click the sphere with your mouse and it will turn gold in color, also. Try dragging the gold sphere manipulator to place the hole location dynamically.

For this exercise, we will use precise linear placement by selecting the appropriate edges and entering the required distances from each. 5 Click the inside edge of the rectangle.

86 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

6 Enter 5 in the value input box and press Tab to lock the horizontal dimension. 7 Next, click the outside edge of the highlighted face.

8 Enter 19 in the value input box and press Tab to lock the vertical dimension. 9 Using the Hole dialog box, enter the following values to create a M6x1 - 6H metric tapped hole with a thread depth of 6 mm: Thread depth

6 mm

Drill Point

118 deg

Termination

Distance

Hole Type

Threaded

Thread Type

ANSI Metric M Profile

Size

6

Designation

M6x1

Class

6H

Direction

Right Hand

Create a Tapped Hole | 87

The Hole dialog box appears as shown in the image.

88 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Create a Tapped Hole | 89

10 Click the OK button to close the dialog box, create the tapped hole, and finish the command. The new feature, Hole1, is added to the Model browser. Previous (page 81) | Next (page 90)

Rotate a Face Using the Triad The Move Face command lets you move one or more faces on a part. You can specify an explicit direction and distance to move a set of faces. You can also freely move and rotate a set of faces or features about the X, Y, or Z axes using the Free Move option. In this final section of the tutorial, the Free Move triad is used to modify the top angled face of the Sliding-pin Hanger.

Click Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move Face on the ribbon.

1

2 Select the angled face on the top of the part. The Move Face Free Move

triad appears. You can interactively position a face or feature by dragging the triad in a planar move, axial move, or free movement. The selected area of the triad controls the movement. The colors help you identify triad axes: ■

Red is the X axis

■

Green is the Y axis

■

Blue is the Z axis

90 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

When you first activate the triad, its origin sphere is coincident with the geometry you want to transform. Click a triad section or drag to indicate the type of transform you want. As you select other parts of the triad, you can drag or enter precise coordinates corresponding to your selection. The triad is comprised of the following elements: ■

Arrowheads move the triad along the axes.

■

Rotational manipulators rotate the triad around the axis. Click the red rotational manipulator to rotate in the YZ plane dynamically around the X axis. Click the green rotational manipulator to rotate dynamically in the XZ plane around the Y axis. Click the blue rotational manipulator to rotate dynamically in the XY plane around the Z axis.

■

Planes move the triad in the selected plane.

■

Sphere allows unrestricted movement in the view plane.

In the next step, we rotate the angled face in the XZ plane using the green rotational manipulator. It may be helpful to rotate the view a bit to provide easier access to the manipulator. 3

Click the Free Orbit command in the Navigation Bar at the right of the graphics window. The rotation symbol appears in the graphics window with both vertical and horizontal axes. Click inside the rotation symbol. Press and hold the left mouse button as you move your cursor

Rotate a Face Using the Triad | 91

to approximate the viewing angle shown in the image.

When you are satisfied with the new view, press the Esc key to exit the Free Orbit command.

92 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

TIP You can quickly access the Free Orbit function in the middle of another command by pressing and holding function key F4 as you rotate the view. When the view is rotated to your satisfaction, release the function key to resume the previous command. You can also use the ViewCube to orbit the model. Click and drag the cube to adjust your view.

4 Click the green rotational manipulator and drag to the right to see the effects of a negative rotation. Drag to the left to view a positive rotation. 5 Enter 2 in the value input box and click the green Ok button to rotate the face 2° in the positive direction. The Move Face command terminates and the new feature, Move Face1, is added to the Model browser. 6 Press F6 to restore the Home view.

Rotate a Face Using the Triad | 93

7 Save and close the file. This concludes the Introduction to Direct Manipulation tutorial. Previous (page 84) | Next (page 94)

Summary In this tutorial, you learned how to: ■ Revolve and extrude profiles using Direct Manipulation. ■

Create a parallel work plane using a distance arrow manipulator.

■

Project a coordinate axis.

■

Sketch geometry and dimension using Dynamic Input.

■

Mirror a sketch profile.

■

Create a fillet using the mini-toolbar.

■

Create a tapped hole.

■

Rotate an existing face using the Move Face Triad.

What Next? In this exercise, the Sliding-pin Hanger sketch profile was provided for you. To learn how to create a part from scratch and gain further experience with sketching, part modeling, and work feature commands, try the Parts 1 and Parts 2 tutorials. Previous (page 90)

94 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

5

Parts 1

About this tutorial

Create parts from sketches. Category

New Users

Time Required

60 minutes

95

Tutorial File Used

Start a new part file (metric).

In this tutorial, you work with various commands and workflows in Inventor to build 3D parts. This tutorial exposes you to various feature creation commands and workflows you can use when you create 3D parts. If the finished part is the correct size and shape, your modeling effort is successful. Objectives ■ Create a part from a sketch. ■

Add dimensions and constraints to sketch geometry.

■

Create and use parameters.

■

Use feature commands such as Extrude and the Hole command.

■

Use the pattern command to array features.

■

Save a copy of a part as a new file.

Prerequisites ■ Complete the Sketch Constraints and Introduction to Direct Manipulation tutorials. ■

Set these options in Application Options, Sketch tab: ■ Apply driven dimension - Select ■

Grid lines – Clear

■

Minor grid lines – Clear

■

Axes - Select

■

Snap to grid – Clear

■

Edit dimension when created - Select

■

Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit - Select

■

Autoproject part origin on sketch create - Select

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 97)

96 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor In this section, we apply horizontal and vertical constraints to constrain the shape to the X,Y, Z coordinates 0, 0, 0. We then add dimensions, create named parameters and use equations. Adding relationships between dimensions reduces the amount of edits, especially in complex parts. You can also add mathematical formulas to dimensions. A link is provided in the exercise to the operators that can be used in equations.

1

Click the Autodesk Inventor icon to start a new part. Select New to open the Create New File dialog box.

2 Click the metric folder to start a new metric part. Under the Part category,

double-click Standard (mm).ipt

.

If your sketch settings match the recommendations listed previously, you see an X axis, a Y axis, and a point at 0,0,0. 3

Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Rectangle. Select Rectangle Two Point from the drop-down menu, or select Two Point Rectangle from the marking menu. Sketch a rectangle approximately centered about 0,0.

4

Apply a Horizontal constraint between the origin and the midpoint of a vertical line. Hover your cursor near the midpoint of the vertical line to display and select the midpoint.

Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor | 97

5

Apply a Vertical constraint between the origin and the midpoint of a horizontal line. Hover your cursor near the midpoint of the horizontal line to display and select the midpoint. If the logic of these picks seems confusing, imagine the axis between the two points you are picking.

6

On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension, or select General Dimension from the marking menu.

7 Place a horizontal dimension. 8 In the Edit Dimension dialog box, enter the equation Width=49mm to define a new variable named Width with an initial value of 49 mm. 9 Place a vertical dimension. Highlight the value in the Edit Dimension dialog box. Instead of entering a number, pick the horizontal dimension value. The variable name of the first dimension (Width) appears in the dialog box. Click the check mark to link the current dimension to the first dimension. The vertical dimension displays as fx:49. The display means that a formula is in effect for the vertical dimension and the current value is 49. 10 Right-click and select Done [ESC] from the marking menu to exit the Dimension command. You have created another equation!

98 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

11 To see the entire equation, right click in a blank area of the graphics window. Choose Dimension Display from the overflow menu, and then choose Expression. Notice the variable names and formulas appear. Each dimension is assigned a variable based on the order of creation. d0 is the first value assigned because 0 is the first integer. In this example, d0 was renamed Width and is a “driving” dimension. The second dimension retains the original variable name d1 and is “driven” by the dimension named Width. NOTE The order of creation has no impact on which dimension can be the controlling dimension.

Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor | 99

NOTE The marking menu appears near the area of the screen on which you right-click. Use this technique to control where a marking menu appears. Previous (page 95) | Next (page 100)

Viewing and Editing Parameters You can assign names to the dimension variables or you can create your own parameters. You can also create formulas using mathematical expressions. If you do not create an expression at the time you create a dimension, you can use the parameters dialog box to add or edit equations. 1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤ Parameters to open the Parameters dialog box. 2 Notice that d0 inside the Model Parameters column is displayed as Width. The model parameter also shows d1 is equal to the value of Width.

NOTE Variables names are case sensitive and no spaces are allowed in the name. 3 Select Done when finished. TIP You can use algebraic operators in the equation area or in the Edit Dimension dialog box to create a mathematical formula. Incomplete or invalid equations display in red.

100 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

4 Right-click in a blank area of the graphics window. Choose Dimension Display from the overflow menu, and then Tolerance to display the dimensions without the parameter names. 5 Finish the sketch using one of the following methods:

■

Select the Finish Sketch command.

■

Right-click in the graphics window, and choose Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu.

■

Click the Return button on the Quick Access toolbar at the top left of the screen display.

After finishing the sketch, the view automatically rotates to the Home (isometric) view. 6 Create the extrusion.

Click the 3D Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude, or select Extrude from the marking menu. Click and drag the gold distance arrow manipulator until the value 20 mm appears in the value input box. Alternatively, you can enter 20 in the field using the keyboard. 7 Click the green Ok button to create the extrusion and finish the command. 8

Save the file with the name End Cap Back.

Previous (page 97) | Next (page 101)

Create and Pattern a Hole In the next section, we will create a hole using offset sketch geometry to determine hole placement. After we create the hole, we will use the rectangular pattern command to create additional holes. There are several reasons to use a hole instead of an extrusion with the cut option: ■ Using a Hole command instead of an extrusion with a cut provides more control over the part feature.

Create and Pattern a Hole | 101

■

The drafting environment contains a hole note command which can associatively extract all the details of a hole.

To begin:

1

Start a sketch on the part face using one of these methods to start a new sketch (the second option is the most direct and offers the least amount of mouse movement). ■ On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ Create 2D Sketch, and then select the part face to sketch on. ■

Select the face to sketch on. When the mini-toolbar appears, click the third button on the right labeled with the tooltip, Create Sketch.

■

Select the face to sketch on, then right-click and select New Sketch from the marking menu.

The edges of the extrusion are copied to the current sketch.

102 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

TIP The icons for 2D Sketch and 3D Sketch are similar. They provide two different sketching environments. If you start a 3D sketch, perform an Undo and start a new 2D Sketch. On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset.

2

3 Select one of the edges, then drag it to the inside, and click to place. All edges highlight and drag. If all the edges do not highlight, right-click and make sure Loop Select and Constrain Offset are checked in the overflow menu, then retry the selection. ■ Enable Loop Select to allow all planar continuous sketch geometry to be selected as a group. Disable to select individual edges. ■

4

Enable Constrain Offset to apply automatic constraints which allow one offset distance to determine the position for the entire selection. Disable to allow each edge to be dimensioned independently.

Start the Dimension command. Dimension the offset geometry 5 mm away from a feature edge.

5 Place a horizontal and vertical dimension on the two edges of the offset geometry. The horizontal and vertical dimensions appear in parentheses as reference (driven) dimensions. These dimensions will be used later to extract the spacing in the feature pattern. NOTE If you receive a warning when you dimension the offset sketch geometry, choose Accept to create a driven dimension. This message appears if you did not choose Apply driven dimension in the Application Options ➤ Sketch tab.

6

7

Finish the Sketch.

Click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Hole, or select Hole from the marking menu. Set the Placement option to From Sketch. Select the lower left vertex in the offset sketch to position the hole. Set the hole diameter to 6 mm and the termination to Through All, then choose OK to create the hole.

Create and Pattern a Hole | 103

104 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

The sketch is “consumed” under the hole feature in the browser. 8 To select the 39-mm sketch reference dimensions for the hole pattern spacing, they must be visible. Locate the hole feature in the browser, and click + to expand and show the sketch. Right-click the sketch, and choose Visibility from the context menu.

9

10

Click 3D Model tab ➤ Pattern panel ➤ Rectangular. The Features selection arrow is selected. Pick the Hole. If you are viewing the hole in a plan view, it is difficult to select the hole on the part. Rotate

Create and Pattern a Hole | 105

the view slightly in 3D before selecting the hole on the part. You can also select the hole directly in the Model browser. IMPORTANT Do NOT select the extruded body, or it will be patterned with the hole. 11 Pick the Direction 1 arrow, and then choose a horizontal edge to set the direction. The edge you choose determines the initial direction. For example, if you choose the lower model or sketch edge, the horizontal pattern direction is to the left. If you choose the upper model or sketch edge, the horizontal pattern direction is to the right.

Use the Flip direction arrow to reverse the direction. Set the count to two, and then highlight the text in the dimension spacing field. With the text highlighted, select the horizontal sketch dimension to use the dimension value for the spacing. Pick the Direction 2 arrow, and then pick a vertical model or sketch edge. Set the count to two, and then highlight the text in the dimension field. Select the vertical reference dimension to use the dimension value.

106 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

12 Click OK to create the pattern. After you create the pattern, right-click Sketch2 in the Model browser, and turn off the sketch Visibility. Previous (page 100) | Next (page 107)

Create a Revolved Feature In this section, we create a revolved feature using projected model edges. Projected edges help “anchor” the geometry to the model when no edges are projected. Use the Revolvecommand to create cylindrical shapes quickly. 1 Expand the Origin folder in the browser, right-click on the YZ Plane, and select New Sketch from the context menu. Turn Visibility on to view the YZ Plane in the graphics screen.

Create a Revolved Feature | 107

2 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Slice Graphics from the overflow menu, or choose F7 to toggle Slice Graphics on and off. Navigate to a plan view using the ViewCube (use Right, for example.).

3

Select Project Geometry to copy a parallel model edge to the sketch in the center of the part.

4

Start the Line command and begin to sketch a shape. Start with a vertical line from the midpoint of the projected geometry. A green dot indicates the midpoint.

108 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

TIP An explicit horizontal line on the lower section of the sketch is not required to create a closed shape. Inventor uses Coincident constraints to determine closed boundaries. If the two vertical lines are attached to the projected edge of the sketch with Coincident constraints, there is no need to draw the line.

5

Dimension the sketch as shown in the following image. Apply a Collinear constraint to the outer vertical edges as shown in the following image. It enables both lines to be controlled by the same dimension. All sketch elements change color to indicate that the sketch is fully constrained. TIP If the sketch is not fully constrained, one or both of the outside vertical lines are probably not attached to the projected line. Apply coincident constraints to attach the ends (indicated by the arrows in the following image) to the projected line. You can also apply a coincident constraint using a drag operation to connect elements.

Create a Revolved Feature | 109

6

7

Finish the sketch.

On the Model tab, select the Revolve command. The closed boundary sketch profile you just completed should already be highlighted. If not, select it. Next, the highlighted axis button in the mini-toolbar prompts you to pick an axis to revolve around. Pick the center line.

110 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

TIP ■

If you define the axis line as a centerline, Autodesk Inventor selects the axis for you. Define the axis as a centerline to dimension the diameter when you dimension from the centerline to an outer edge.

■

To designate the central axis as a sketch centerline, you must be in the Sketch environment. Select the axis, and then choose the centerline icon on the Format panel of the Sketch tab.

Create a Revolved Feature | 111

Finished shape -

112 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

Previous (page 101) | Next (page 113)

Use Save As to Create a Part We now turn the part into two unique parts. There are multiple ways to create a part from the existing model. Two common methods are: ■ Use Save As to create a part containing all the features in an editable state. ■

Create a table driven iPart, and suppress or enable unique features.

Before we create a new unique part, we create the sketch to locate the tapped hole on both parts. 1 Start a new sketch on the top face as shown in the following image. TIP Use the ViewCube to navigate to the Top view.

Use Save As to Create a Part | 113

2 Create and dimension a line 6 mm from the midpoint of the front edge. Make sure it is either perpendicular to the front edge or parallel to a side edge. 3 Finish the sketch.

4

Save the file.

5 Click Cap Front

114 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

➤ Save As ➤ Save As, and name the new part End

6 You are now working in the new file, and the origin file End Cap Back has been closed. We are now ready to add the unique features to End Cap Front. Previous (page 107) | Next (page 115)

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole In this section, we introduce the work axis command. We will use the work axis and a work plane to simplify creating two intersecting holes.

1

Start the Hole command. The Placement option From Sketch is active.

2 Select the far end of the 6-mm line for the hole center location. Set the hole depth to 14 mm.

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole | 115

3 Set the hole type to tapped. Change the thread type to ANSI Metric M Profile. Set the size to 5 and the designation to M5 x 0.8.

116 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

4 Click OK to finish the command and create the tapped hole. 5

On the ribbon, click the down arrow on the 3D Model tab ➤ Work

Features panel ➤ Axis command to display work axis options. Then select Through Center of Circular or Elliptical Edge from the Axis drop-down menu. Move your cursor over the tapped hole, and click to place the Work Axis when you see the preview image of the axis. 6

On the ribbon, click the down arrow on the 3D Model tab ➤ Work Features panel ➤ Plane command to display work plane options.

Select Angle to Plane around Edge from the Plane drop-down menu. Pick the front face of the part and the work axis as

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole | 117

shown. Change the Angle in the value input box to 0, and then pick the green check mark to create the work plane.

7 Start a new sketch on the front face of the revolved shape. 8 Create a vertical line on the center point. Add a 12.5-mm dimension to the line. 9

Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point. Place a center point at the end of the vertical line to allow the Hole command to detect and use the Center Point as a hole location. Finish the sketch.

118 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

10

Start the Hole command. The Center Point is selected.

11 Set the hole diameter to 4mm. In the Termination drop down, select To and then pick the work plane that passes through the tapped hole as the termination location.

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole | 119

12 Click OK to finish the command and create the hole. If you edit the sketch that locates the tapped hole, the work plane and the 4-mm hole that terminates on the plane will reposition.

120 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

TIP The cutaway image was created by starting a sketch on the YZ Origin plane, then choosing Slice Graphics from the right-click context menu. It is not required for this exercise. Previous (page 113) | Next (page 122)

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole | 121

Create a Concentric Hole It is possible to create holes with no pre-existing sketch. In the next section, we introduce you to alternative hole placement methods.

1

Start the Hole command.

2 On the Placement drop down menu, select Concentric. 3 The Plane select option is enabled. Choose the front face of the cylindrical shape to define the plane. 4 The Concentric Reference select option is enabled. Choose an edge of the cylinder to position the hole at the center of the circular face.

5 Set the diameter to 14 mm. 6 Set the Termination option to Through All.

122 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

7 Choose OK to create the through hole. 8 On the ribbon, click View tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Object Visibility and then clear the All Workfeatures check box from the drop-down menu to change the Work Plane and Work Axis display to off. 9 Save the file. Previous (page 115) | Next (page 124)

Create a Concentric Hole | 123

Edit the Tapped Hole Location In the next series of steps, we edit the sketch to move the tapped hole location to demonstrate a feature edit and to show the associativity between features. In this scenario, a change order was submitted stating that the tapped hole on the front cylinder cap must be located in the middle of the part. To begin: 1 Locate the tapped hole in the Model browser. If you did not delete any holes in the first part of the exercise, it should be named Hole2 in the browser. 2 Click + next to the hole feature to expose the sketch beneath the feature. Right-click the sketch, and choose Edit Sketch from the context menu. TIP You can also choose Edit Sketch with a right-click on the feature without exposing the sketch. 3 Double-click the 6-mm dimension to enable the edit box. Change the 6-mm dimension to 10 mm. Notice that when you edit a sketch, the part history is “rolled back” to the feature state that existed at the time the sketch was created.

124 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

4 Exit the sketch. The tapped hole, the work plane, work axis, and 4-mm hole are updated. 5 Save the file and close it. 6 Open the file End Cap Back. Previous (page 122) | Next (page 126)

Edit the Tapped Hole Location | 125

Mirror a Feature We now add a unique feature to the back cylinder cap. Use the Mirror command to create an identical feature on the opposite side of the part. Creating a feature and then mirroring it allows symmetrical features to be controlled by the original feature. When you edit the first instance, the mirrored feature automatically updates.

1

Start the Hole command.

2 In the Hole dialog box, set the Placement to Concentric and the hole type to Counterbore.

126 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

■

Set the counterbore diameter to 26 mm.

■

Set the counterbore depth to 6 mm.

■

Set the drill diameter to 10 mm.

■

Set the Termination to Through All.

Mirror a Feature | 127

3 Click the Plane selection arrow in the dialog box, and then select the front plane of the revolved shape. The hole is previewed and the select arrow is moved to Concentric Reference. 4 On the model in the graphics window, choose the edge of the revolved shape to define the concentric edge.

128 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

5 Choose OK to create the hole.

6

Start the Hole command. Set the Placement to From Sketch, and select the end of the 6-mm line to locate the hole.

7 In the Hole dialog box. ■ Set Hole Type to Drilled. ■

Set Termination to To.

■

Set Hole to Tapped.

■

Set Thread Type to ANSI Metric M Profile.

Mirror a Feature | 129

■

Set Size to 5.

■

Set Designation to M5 x 0.8.

8 Select the interior of the counterbored hole on the model to define the To termination, and then click OK to create the hole.

130 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

9 Start a sketch on the side of the cylinder block shown in the following image. 10

Place a Point, Center Point near the middle of the face, and constrain it to be horizontal and vertical to the outside edges.

Mirror a Feature | 131

11 Finish the sketch.

12

Start the Hole command. Set the Placement type to From Sketch. If there are no other sketches in the model, Autodesk Inventor selects the point. If there are other sketches present, pick the point.

13 Set the hole type to Drilled, the hole diameter to 10 mm, and the hole depth to 10 mm. 14 Click OK to create the hole.

132 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

15

On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Pattern panel ➤ Mirror.

16 The feature selection arrow is active. Select the inside of the hole you just created to add it to the mirror. 17 Change the selection type to Mirror Plane. You can do it in the dialog box, or you can right-click and choose Continue from the pop-up context menu. 18 In the Model browser, under the Origin folder, pick YZ plane to define the mirror plane.

19 Click OK to mirror the feature.

Mirror a Feature | 133

20 Save and close the file. Previous (page 124) | Next (page 135)

134 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

Summary

Congratulations! You have successfully completed this tutorial. In this exercise you: ■ Created a part from a sketch. ■

Used the dimension and constraint commands to control the size and behavior of the sketch geometry.

■

Used parameters to name and link dimensions.

■

Used feature commands to create solid geometry.

■

Used the pattern command to array features.

■

Saved a copy of a part to create a new part file.

What Next? - This tutorial introduced you to basic part modeling commands. To learn about additional part modeling techniques, such as the use of work features, see the Parts 2 tutorial. Previous (page 126)

Summary | 135

136

6

Parts 2

About this tutorial

Explore construction techniques to create elements of your model. Category

New Users

Time Required

90 minutes

Tutorial File Used

Start a new part file.

137

In this tutorial, you build a clamp mounting base using sketch geometry and common construction techniques. Objectives ■ Create a work plane that bisects the part to mirror symmetrical features. ■

Create an offset work plane for a new sketch.

■

Create a tangent work plane to locate a hole on a curved face.

Prerequisites ■ Complete the Sketch Constraints, Introduction to Direct Manipulation, and Parts 1 tutorials. Set these options in Application Options, Sketch tab: ■ Apply driven dimension - Select

■

■

Edit Dimension when created - Select

■

Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit - Select

■

Autoproject part origin on sketch create - Select

■

Grid lines – Clear

■

Snap to grid – Clear

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 138)

Create the Mounting Base Profile In this exercise, we sketch a rectangle and constrain the lower right corner of the first sketch to 0, 0, 0. Constraining a sketch to the origin makes the sketch behavior predictable and eliminates two degrees of freedom by defining the XY location. To begin: 1

Start a new mm part. Sketch a rectangle with the lower right-hand corner located at 0,0.

138 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

2

Start the Dimension command.

3 Create a horizontal dimension with a value of 160 mm and a vertical dimension with a value of 86 mm. The sketch is fully constrained. NOTE If the sketch is not fully constrained, make sure that the sketch is constrained to the Origin.

4

5

Exit the sketch. Use the Finish Sketch command, the Return command, or right-click and choose Finish Sketch from the marking menu to exit the sketch environment.

Start the Extrude command. Extrude the sketch 15 mm.

Previous (page 137) | Next (page 140)

Create the Mounting Base Profile | 139

Sketch on a Part Face In the next step, there are multiple approaches to creating the feature: ■ Create an extrusion the entire width of the part, and then cut out the middle.

■

Create an extrusion the exact depth and then mirror it:

140 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

For this exercise, we detail the second technique.

1

Use Direct Manipulation to start a new sketch on the side of the part. Click the face indicated. When the mini-toolbar appears, select the third button on the right, Create Sketch.

Sketch on a Part Face | 141

2 Create and dimension the sketch profile geometry as shown. You do not have to draw the bottom horizontal line if you connect the line endpoints to the projected geometry. As you dimension the profile, keep in mind that the 53 mm dimension is from the bottom projected edge as shown in the image.

3

4

Finish the sketch.

Extrude the profile 18 mm. Use the Direction 2 button on the mini-toolbar to extrude the profile to the interior of the part.

142 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

TIP The default direction for extrude/join is away from existing material. The default direction for extrude/cut is towards existing material. It is good idea to view a model in a 3D view before you extrude a profile to visualize the direction. If you make a mistake and extrude a profile to the wrong side, use Edit Feature and flip the direction.

5

Use Direct Manipulation to start the Fillet command. Click the edge indicated and select Create Fillet from the mini-toolbar. Drag the distance arrow manipulator to add an 8-mm radius to the edge, or enter 8 in the value input box.

Sketch on a Part Face | 143

6 Click the green check mark to finish the command.

7

Start the Hole command. ■ Set the Placement option to Concentric. ■

Select the plane and the concentric edge.

■

Set the hole diameter to 11 mm and the Termination to Through All

Select OK to create the hole.

144 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

Previous (page 138) | Next (page 145)

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes In the next section, we allow Autodesk Inventor to place a plane in the middle of the part. This technique is useful because it does not require any dimensions or edits to maintain the position. If the width of the part is edited, the plane stays centered. We will then create an offset work plane to use as the location of a new sketched feature.

1

Select Midplane between Two Parallel Planes from the Plane drop-down menu. To create a work plane that bisects the part, pick the face with the new feature and then the parallel face on the opposite side of the part. A work plane is created in the middle of the part.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 145

146 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

NOTE The initial size of a work plane is determined by the size of the existing features. To resize a work plane, first select the corner, then drag the corner when the resize symbol appears.

2

Start the Mirror command. Select the extrusion, the fillet, and the through hole as the features to mirror.

TIP You can select the features on the part or in the Model browser.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 147

3 When you finish selecting the features, choose the Mirror Plane selection arrow in the dialog box. You can also right-click and choose Continue from the context menu to change the selection arrow. Select the work plane in the center of the part to satisfy the Mirror Plane pick. Click the OK button to create the mirrored features and terminate the Mirror command.

4

Select Offset from Plane from the Plane drop-down menu. Steps 4-6 create a work plane that is parallel to the center plane and offset a specific distance.

148 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

5 Select the center work plane, and drag the new work plane towards you using the distance arrow manipulator. The Offset value input box displays with a numeric value in it as you drag (if not, clear all selections and restart the command, then try again). 6 Enter 30 mm in the Offset value input box to specify the exact distance from the center plane. 7 Click the green check mark to finish the command.

8

Start a new sketch on the offset work plane. (Select the edge of the work plane and click Create Sketch from the contextual mini-toolbar.) NOTE When you select a work plane for a new sketch, no geometry is projected to “lock” the sketch to the part. Project model edges to obtain geometry for connecting the sketch.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 149

9

Start the Project Geometry command. Select the front edge as shown to project it to the sketch plane, and then sketch and dimension the profile shown. Be sure to select the bottom edge of the part when creating the 25 mm dimension.

10

150 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

Finish the sketch.

11

Extrude the profile 14 mm towards the interior of the part. Use the Direction 2 button on the mini-toolbar to change the orientation before selecting OK.

12 ■

Start the Hole command. Set the Placement option to Concentric.

■

Select the plane and the concentric edge.

■

Set the hole diameter to 8mm and the Termination to Through All

13 Select OK to create the hole.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 151

14

Start the Mirror command. Select the extrusion and the through-hole as the features to mirror. Select the work plane in the center of the part to satisfy the Mirror Plane pick.

We now create two chamfers on the front of the base to create a smaller footprint for the front of the base. To determine the chamfer distance, we use the Measure Distance command to extract the distance between the two planes. 15

Start the Measure Distance command. You will find this command in the marking menu, or on the Measure panel of the Tools tab. Select the plane on the outside of the part and the plane on the front face of the small mounting tab. The distance between the two faces displays as 13 mm. We will use this distance to create a chamfer that terminates at the edge of this feature and the edge of the mirrored copy.

152 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

16

Start the Chamfer command. Select the Two Distances option from the fly-out button on the mini-toolbar.

17 In the left value input box in the mini-toolbar, enter a value of 13 mm for Distance 1, and a value of 40 mm for Distance 2 in the right value input box. Click the Edges button and select the vertical edge on the outside of the part. If your preview image does not look like the preview in the following image, reverse the values for the distance input, or use the flip direction arrow to reverse the reference face.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 153

18 Click the green Apply button (+) to create the chamfer and stay in the Chamfer command. Select the opposite outside edge to create the

154 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

second chamfer. Reverse the input values, or use the flip direction button to achieve the desired results. In the next exercise, we create a tapped hole for a set screw on a curved face. To do this, we create a work plane that is tangent to the curve and parallel to the base. Previous (page 140) | Next (page 155)

Create a Tangent Work Plane In this section, we create a work plane on a curved surface to provide a flat area for a 2D sketch. We use projected geometry to assist in accurately placing hole location geometry. 1 Right-click the XY Plane in the Origin folder, and check the Visibility option to turn it on.

NOTE As you become a more advanced user, you might prefer to control globally the visibility of Work Geometry, Sketches, and more by using an Object Visibility filter in the View tab. If you switch the visibility off using these controls, right-click a work plane, other work feature, or sketch and note that the visibility is enabled but the feature is off. To enable it, switch the visibility to on in the Object Visibility area.

2

Select Tangent to Surface and Parallel to Plane from the Plane drop-down menu. Select the edge of the XY Plane and the tangent face of the curved surface to create the work plane.

Create a Tangent Work Plane | 155

3

Start a new sketch on the work plane.

4

Start the Project Geometry command. Select the two edges of the mounting tab as shown in the following image to project them to the sketch plane. Repeat this process for the other tab before leaving the Project Geometry command.

5

Start the Line command, and draw a line from the midpoint of one line to the midpoint of the other line. Repeat this process for other tab.

6

Place a Point, Center Point at the midpoint of each line to locate the hole in the middle of the mounting tab. These points also allow the Hole command to detect them for hole placement.

156 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

7

8

Finish the sketch.

Start the Hole command. The Placement option defaults to From Sketch because Autodesk Inventor detects that an unconsumed sketch is present. Autodesk Inventor detects the hole centers and selects them for the hole location. TIP Autodesk Inventor automatically selects hole locations from sketch points if no other unconsumed sketch exists.

9 Select the Tapped Hole option. Set the Thread Type to ANSI Metric M Profile, the Size to 6, and the Designation to M6x1.

Create a Tangent Work Plane | 157

10 Select To in the Termination option to terminate the tapped holes on the center holes. 11 Select an inside face of one of the existing holes to satisfy the termination selection. Make sure the check box in the dialog box is selected as shown here, or the operation fails. Click the OK button to create the holes and exit the Hole command.

158 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

Previous (page 145) | Next (page 160)

Create a Tangent Work Plane | 159

Add the Base Mounting Holes We are almost done. We now create the mounting holes to secure the base. Make sure that the work plane in the middle of the part is visible.

1

Start a new sketch on the top face of the part.

2

Start the Project Geometry command. Select the work plane in the middle of the part to project the work plane as a line to the current sketch.

3

Place two points (Point, Center Point) vertically in-line with each other.

4

Place a vertical constraint between the two points to align them.

5

Add a 16-mm dimension from the center of the base to the upper center point.

6

Dimension the overall distance between the two points. Pick the two center points. Instead of adding a number for the overall distance, clear the value in the dialog box. Then, select the 16-mm dimension to add the dimension variable to the dialog box. Enter the multiplication operator *, and then the number 2. NOTE The dimension variables in your sketch may differ from the numbers presented in the following image. If they do, it does not affect the exercise.

7

Add a 33-mm dimension from the front edge of the part to one of the center points.

160 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

8

9

10

Finish the sketch.

Start the Hole command. Place two through holes of 11 mm each on the center points.

Start a new sketch on the top face of the part.

Add the Base Mounting Holes | 161

11

Start the Line command. Create a line from the mid-point of the back edge of the base towards the middle of the part.

12

Add a dimension of 16 mm to the line.

13

Finish the sketch. In the remaining steps, we create a counterbore clearance hole for a hex head bolt from a look up table.

14

Start the Hole command. Pick the endpoint of the line to specify the hole location.

162 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

15 Select the counterbore hole with the clearance hole option as shown in the following image. The system determines the proper counterbore size for the fastener you specify.

Add the Base Mounting Holes | 163

16 Select the fastener parameters listed in the image, and then click OK to create the hole. 17 Save the file. You have successfully completed this exercise! Previous (page 155) | Next (page 164)

Summary The completed part with all work features turned off.

In this tutorial, you created a: ■ Part from a sketch. ■

Symmetrical work plane in the middle of the part.

■

Planar parallel offset work plane.

■

Tangent work plane.

■

Tapped hole on a cylinder.

164 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

■

Counterbore and clearance hole from a look-up table for a specified fastener.

You used the mirror command to duplicate symmetrical features, and projected geometry from existing features to a sketch. Previous (page 160)

Summary | 165

166

Assemblies

7

167

About this tutorial

168 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

Insert and position components in the Assembly environment. Category

New Users

Time Required

60 minutes

Tutorial Files Used

Cylinder Base.ipt, Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.iam, Clamp Sketch.ipt, Long Shaft.ipt, Short Shaft.ipt, Lock Pin.ipt, 6mm SHCS.ipt.

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. An assembly is a collection of components constrained to each other. This exercise introduces workflows you can use to insert and precisely position components relative to each other. Objectives The goal of the tutorial is to introduce techniques you can use to position and analyze the movement of components. Some of the topics covered are: ■ Assembly constraints ■

Contact sets

■

Flexible assemblies

■

Analyze interference

■

Insert components

Prerequisites ■ Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding. ■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 170)

About this tutorial | 169

Create the Assembly To begin, create the top-level assembly. 1 Set you active project to tutorial_files. 2 Start a new Standard (mm) assembly.

3

On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Place , or right-click and choose Place Component from the context menu.

4 Select Cylinder Clamp ➤ Cylinder Base.ipt and choose Open. The component is placed in the assembly. NOTE By default, you can place multiple copies. If you click in the graphics window, you will place place two copies. If you accidentally placed two copies remove one before proceeding. 5 Right-click, and select Done, or press ESC to exit the command. 6 Orient the view as shown in the following image. Set the view as the Home view. Make sure Work Plane1 in the center of the base is visible. TIP If necessary, expand the list under Cylinder Base in the browser, right-click Work Plane1, and turn on Visibility.

170 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

7 Save the file with the name Cyl_Clamp.iam. Previous (page 168) | Next (page 171)

Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid In a top down workflow, create a part or subassembly in the assembly using Create Component. At the prompt to select the sketch plane, select an origin plane, a work plane, or part face. This pick establishes the coordinate system for the new component. In the Create In-Place Component dialog box, the option Constrain sketch plane to the selected face or plane is enabled by default. This option applies a Flush constraint between the new component and the selected face or plane. Clear the check mark to apply no initial constraint. The following are some of the advantages to creating a part in the assembly: ■ Use a top-down workflow to design a component in place. ■

Project edges from other components to a part sketch.

■

Measure clearance space for the component envelope.

To create a part in the assembly, start the Create Component command, follow the steps described previously, and use the provided clamp sketch as a guide.

Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid | 171

To save time, insert a 2D part in the assembly. Apply assembly constraints to position the 2D sketch on the base. Then extrude the sketch into a solid. 1 Start Place Component. 2 Place one copy of Clamp Sketch.ipt, and stay in the Place Component command.

3 While still in the the Place Component command, move the cursor over the edge of the sketch circle. In the graphics window: ■

The entire Clamp Sketch highlights.

■

A copy of the Clamp Sketch moves with your cursor.

■

A tooltip prompts you to make a second selection.

When the axis displays, select the circle, as shown in the following image. A mini-toolbar displays in the upper left-hand corner of the graphics window.

172 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

4 To select an axis, move the cursor over the inside of the hole on the base. When the axis preview displays, select inside the hole, as shown in the following image. Do not select the edge of the hole when a green dot appears. The dot is a point constraint, and does not result in an axis to axis constraint.

Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid | 173

The copy of the Clamp Sketch is attached to the Cylinder Base, and the mini-toolbar moves to the area where you clicked. 5 Click OK to create the constraint. Hold the left mouse button down as you select the 2D sketch, and then push or pull on the geometry. The movement is limited to the axis you defined. 6 In the browser, under Clamp Sketch, expand the Origin folder, right-click the XY Plane, and turn on Visibility 7 Start the Assemble command. The mini-toolbar displays in the upper left-hand corner of the graphics window. 8 On the clamp sketch, select the XY Plane to satisfy the first pick. 9 Select the work plane in the center of the base, as shown in the following image.

174 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

The mate constraint displays in the preview. 10 On the mini-toolbar, click Constraint Type, and select Mate-Flush. Click the green OK button to apply the constraint and close the mini-toolbar. The following image shows the correct Mate/Flush solution on the left. The solution on the right is the result of a Mate/Mate. If you made a mistake, you can edit the constraint and apply the correct solution. In this case, the correct selection was specified for you. In the future, use the preview to help you decide whether to apply a Mate/Mate or a Mate/Flush constraint between two planes.

Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid | 175

11 Click the Clamp Sketch, and hold the left mouse button down. Drag the 2D sketch. The part still has one degree of rotational freedom. All ungrounded components initially have six degrees of freedom: three translational (linear X, Y, and Z), and three rotational (rotational X,Y, and Z). 12 Click View tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Degrees of Freedom. A rotational arrow on the Clamp Sketch indicates the part still has rotational freedom. Select the Degrees of Freedom command again to turn it off. 13 Save the file as Cylinder_Main.iam. Previous (page 170) | Next (page 176)

Create a Contact Set Add a contact set to an assembly and then set limits on the motion. Use a contact set to stop movement when bodies collide, as they would in the physical world. To avoid slow calculation time, limit the number of components in a contact set to only the components necessary. 1 Open the file Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.iam, located in \Tutorial Files\Cylinder Clamp. 2 Use the left mouse button to click and drag the blue shaft on the assembly. The shaft can move in a linear and rotational direction. You can also pull the piston and shaft completely out of the body. The linear

176 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

and rotational freedom is intentional so that the piston can move in a higher-level assembly. Before proceeding, use Undo to restore the piston to the position it was in when you opened the file.

3

On the ribbon, click Inspect tab ➤ Interference panel ➤ Activate Contact Solver. The command activates, but no components belong to the contact set yet.

4 In the browser, right-click each of the following components, or in the graphics area right-click the components. Enable Contact Set in the context menu. ■ Cylinder Head Cover_Front ■

Cylinder Head Cover_Back

■

Piston

5 Push and pull on the piston shaft. The piston body movement is limited by the physical contact with the front and back cylinder heads. NOTE Rapid mouse movement allows the piston to pass through the cylinder cover bodies. This intentional behavior enables you to move contact set members in or out of a closed body. 6 Pull the piston to the end of its stroke. In the Interference panel, click Activate Contact Solver again to deactivate it. 7 Right-click the Cylinder Body and clear Enabled to make it easier to select internal parts. When you turn off Enabled, a component displays transparently for reference, and you cannot select it. A component that is not enabled appears green in the browser. To re-enable a component, right-click the component in the browser, and click Enabled. 8 Start the Constraint command. In the dialog box, do not change any settings. 9 Click the end face of the Cylinder Head Cover- Back, as shown in the following image.

Create a Contact Set | 177

10 Rotate the assembly or use Select Other to select the back face of the Piston, as shown in the previous image. 11 Click More, and specify the following: Maximum: 35mm Minimum: 0 12 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box. Drag the piston rod. The piston stops at either end. 13 In the browser, right-click the cylinder body and select Enabled. Experiment with Limits settings to change the range of motion. In the browser, edit the constraint. Expand the Piston, right-click the last Mate constraint, and select Edit. If you click Use Offset As The Resting Position, you can enter a default value for the piston position. If you drag the piston and let go, it snaps back to the resting position. Previous (page 171) | Next (page 179)

178 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

Insert and Constrain a Subassembly Constrain the piston to the Base and the 2D sketch part. The next portion of the exercise assumes Cylinder_Main.iam and Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.iam are both open. 1 On the ribbon, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 Click inside the window containing Cylinder Body Sub_Assy. 3

Click and drag the assembly icon from the browser to the Cylinder_Main window. The subassembly is inserted in the main assembly without using the Place Component command.

4 Save and Close the subassembly file. 5 Maximize the window containing the main assembly. 6 Start the Constrain command. 7 Apply a Mate axis/axis constraint between the 2D sketch and the hole in the piston rod, as shown in the following image.

Insert and Constrain a Subassembly | 179

When the subassembly is open in a separate window, the piston is free to move. When you insert the subassembly in the upper level assembly, the free movement is disabled. To finish constraining the subassembly in the main assembly, you must enable the freedom to move in the upper-level assembly. If the piston is not free to spin, the subassembly cannot rotate into the correct position. 8 Locate Cylinder Body Sub_Assy in the browser. 9 Right-click the subassembly, and select Flexible in the context menu. It activates the freedom of movement that was present in the subassembly in the upper level assembly. The subassembly icon in the browser changes to indicate that Flexible status is active.

180 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Position panel ➤ Rotate to move the subassembly until the tapped holes in cylinder end caps are facing up, as shown in the following image. Right-click, and select Done. Unlike a view rotation, this command physically rotates a component in space. If you take the time to orient components relative to each other before you apply constraints, the constraints behave more predictably when applied.

Insert and Constrain a Subassembly | 181

10 Start the Constrain command. Accept the default settings. 11 In the browser, expand Cylinder Base and Cylinder Body Sub_Assy to expose the browser tree. Expand the Origin folder in Cylinder Body Sub_Assy. 12 Select Work Plane1 under Cylinder Base and YZ Plane in the Origin folder under Cylinder Body Sub_Assy to apply a Mate plane/plane constraint.

182 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

If the subassembly turns inside-out, drag it toward the back of the base to correct the orientation as shown in the following image. The constraints you applied limit the movement.

13 Start the Constrain command. Accept the default options. 14 Select the center of each of the holes indicated in the following image to place a Mate axis/axis constraint.

Insert and Constrain a Subassembly | 183

15 Drag the 2D sketch part to check the motion of your digital prototype.

Previous (page 176) | Next (page 185)

184 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

Edit a Part in an Assembly In this section, we will finish creating the 2D hinge clamp without leaving the assembly. The edit-in-place workflow allows you to project edges from other components into a sketch if necessary. You can also measure the available clearance before creating a solid. We will then check the part for interference in the required range of motion. To get started, drag the piston rod or the 2D sketch until the 2D sketch is in a near vertical orientation, as shown in the following image.

1 Right-click the part Clamp Sketch in the browser and select Edit from the pop-up context menu, or right-click the 2D sketch in the graphics window and select Edit Component from the marking menu. You can also double-click the sketch or the part file in the browser to start an edit-in-place operation. Do not choose Open; if you do, the part file opens in a separate window. The inactive assembly components appear transparent.

Edit a Part in an Assembly | 185

2 Start the Extrude command. Enter a distance of 32 mm. Use the symmetrical in both directions option. Click OK to create the extrusion.

186 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

3 To remove material from the solid to allow clearance for the piston, start a new 2D sketch on the front face of the clamp as shown in the following image.

Edit a Part in an Assembly | 187

4 Project the geometry at the top of the extrusion to the sketch, as shown in the following image. 5 Sketch a rectangle that is coincident with the projected line, as shown in the following image. 6 Create a vertical constraint between the two edges indicated. NOTE If your geometry does not match the following image after applying the constraint, undo and apply a horizontal constraint. 7 Add a 16-mm horizontal dimension and a 3-mm vertical dimension, as shown in the following image.

188 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

8

Finish the sketch.

9 Start the Extrude command. Cut the profile through the part. Use the All option.

Edit a Part in an Assembly | 189

10 Click OK to create the extrusion.

11

Click the Return command, or right-click and select Finish Edit to return to the assembly environment.

12 On the ribbon, enable the Inspect tab ➤ Interference panel ➤ Activate Contact Solver command. 13 Move the clamp forward until the piston touches the front-end cap.

14

Choose Analyze Interference. Select the piston rod to define set 1. Select the clamp to define set 2. Click OK to check for interference. A small interference is detected where the piston rod passes through the cut in the clamp.

190 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

15 To remove the interference, double-click the clamp hinge to initiate an edit-in-place operation. In the part browser, edit the sketch under Extrusion4, and increase the vertical dimension from 3 mm to 6 mm. Update the part, and return to the assembly. Check for interference again. The interference has been resolved. 16 Save the assembly file and other components if prompted. Previous (page 179) | Next (page 191)

Constrain Cylindrical Components It is best to limit the number of constraints you use to position components. For example, if two components have face-to-face contact, then apply a single Mate constraint to the faces rather than using two Mate constraints on edges. Each constraint you add contributes to file size and complexity. TIP Consider using Grip Snaps to position components and then ground them if you work with large assemblies and the components do not need to move. The following section details the steps to minimally and fully constrain cylindrical components in an assembly. 1 Start the Place Component command. 2 Place one copy of Long Shaft.ipt, and apply these constraints.

Constrain Cylindrical Components | 191

3 Right-click, then choose Repeat Place and place one copy of Short Shaft.ipt. Right-click and select Done when finished.

4

Start the Constrain command, and use Mate/Mate (the default) to constrain the axis of the long shaft to the axis of the lower hole.

5 Choose Apply to place the constraint. 6 Constrain the axis of the short shaft to the axis of the upper hole, as shown in the following image.

7 Choose Apply to place the constraint.

8

Change the constraint type to Mate/Flush.

9 Select the planar face of the base mounting tab first, and then select the planar face at the end of the long shaft. Enter 5 mm for the offset value. Notice that the face selection color matches the color of the selection arrow order. The first selection is blue and the second selection is green. This can help you troubleshoot constraints as you use Autodesk Inventor.

192 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

NOTE If you pick the faces in the reverse order, enter a value of -5 mm. 10 Select Apply to place the constraint and stay in the dialog box to place another Mate/Flush constraint. 11 Pick the planar face of the clamp, and then pick the planar face at the end of the short shaft. Enter an offset value of 4mm, and then click OK to finish the command. The long and short shafts should appear symmetrically constrained as shown in the following image. The shafts are still free to rotate, but the constraints that fix their position relative to the other components are in place.

Constrain Cylindrical Components | 193

In the next segment, we will place and position the two cylindrical lock pins. We will position them in the hole so the flat surface of the pin faces the tapped hole. In this case, we do not want the cylinder to rotate. 1 Start the Place Component command, and place two instances of Lock Pin.ipt.

194 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

2 Select the Cylinder Base component. Right-click, and select Visibility in the context menu to switch off the visibility . 3 Place a Mate/Mate constraint to align each of the lock pins axially to the holes in the end of the Cylinder Body Sub_Assy. The long section should face towards the middle on both lock pins, with the flat area facing up as shown in the following image. TIP Use the Rotate command to re-align the pins if they are constrained axially, but the long section is facing out. After rotating, use Update to recalculate the axial constraint in the new position.

Constrain Cylindrical Components | 195

4 Select the Cylinder Base in the browser. Right-click, and select Visibility to re-enable the component visibility. To align the center of the flat area on the lock pin with the tapped hole in the base, we will create a work axis on the lock pin. 5 Double-click one of the lock pin instances, or right-click and choose EditComponent from the marking menu to initiate an edit-in-place operation. 6 On the View tab ➤ Visibility panel, select Object Visibility and ensure that All Workfeatures is enabled to view the work geometry. 7 On the 3D Model tab ➤ Work Features panel, select Work Axis. 8 Select Work Plane1 and the XZ Plane in the Origin folder of the Lock Pin to create a Work Axis in the middle of the flat cutout. A work axis should appear in the center of the flat section, as shown in the following image.

196 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

9 Right-click, and choose Finish Edit from the marking menu. Alternatively, choose the Return command on the 3D Model tab to finish the local edit and return to the assembly. 10 Start the Constrain command, and place a Mate/Mate constraint between the new work axis and the axis in the center of the tapped hole.

11 Choose Apply to place the constraint. 12 Place a Mate/Mate constraint between the two axes on the remaining lock pin to position the pin in the hole.

Constrain Cylindrical Components | 197

13 Click OK to apply the constraint and exit the dialog box. The lock pins are fully constrained in alignment with the tapped holes. 14 Save the file. In the following image depicting the Cylinder Base, Enabled is toggled off, while Visibility is not. If a component is not enabled, it remains visible in a transparent state, but it is not selectable. A component that is not enabled appears green in the browser. To re-enable a component, select the component in the browser, and choose Enabled in the context menu.

Previous (page 185) | Next (page 198)

Add the Hardware The assembly is nearly complete. We will now finish placing the components necessary to create an accurate Bill of Materials and Parts List. This section of the exercise assumes that you have Content Center installed and available. If Content Center is not available, the required hardware to

198 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

finish the assembly is furnished in the tutorial directory. The steps listed in the following section do not detail the workflow to place the circlips without Content Center. The Content Center allows you to place a component, adjust the size to match the target, and constrain it in a few picks. The target edge for the circlip we will place in the next section is the inside edge noted in the following image.

1 On the Assemble tab ➤ Component panel, choose the drop-down arrow under Place to access the Place from Content Center command. You can also right-click in the graphics screen and select the command from the context menu. 2 Expand the section titled Shaft Parts. 3 Expand the sub-section titled Circlips, and select External.

Add the Hardware | 199

4 Select ANSI B 27.7M in the dialog box, and then choose OK. A preview of the component appears in the graphics window attached to the cursor. The question mark in the preview image indicates that the clip can be automatically resized using AutoDrop.

5 Move your cursor over the inside edge of the groove, and wait for the component to resize automatically. Click the edge when the component is the proper size, and then click the check mark in the AutoDrop dialog box to place and constrain the component.

200 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

6 Repeat to place the remaining circlips. Choose Done from the context menu when finished. There should be four instances of ANSI B 27.7N 3AMI-7 in the browser. 7 Start the Place Component command. 8 Place two copies of 6mm SHCS.ipt in the assembly. 9 Rotate the components, if necessary, to position the hex opening up as shown in the following image.

Add the Hardware | 201

10 Start the Constrain command, and place a Mate/Mate between the centerline of the fastener and the centerline of the hole. 11 Choose Apply, and repeat for the other fastener. Click OK to apply the constraint and finish the command. 12 Turn off the Visibility of the Cylinder Base. 13 Start the Constrain command. Place a Mate/Mate constraint between the planar face at the bottom of the fastener and the planar face of the cutout in the lock pin.

202 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

14 Choose Apply and repeat for the other side. 15 Choose OK to finish. 16 Turn on the Visibility of the Cylinder Base. 17 Save the file. Previous (page 191) | Next (page 204)

Add the Hardware | 203

Summary

Congratulations! You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise, you: ■ Placed components in an assembly. ■

Applied assembly constraints.

■

Edited parts from the assembly environment.

■

Created and used Contact Sets.

■

Enabled the Flexible state on a lower level subassembly.

■

Used interference detection.

■

Placed components using the Content Center library with AutoDrop.

204 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

What Next? Try the Drawings tutorial to learn how to document parts and assemblies using the drafting and view layout commands. Previous (page 198)

Summary | 205

206

8

Drawings

About this tutorial Prepare final drawings of your models. Category

New Users

Time Required

45 minutes

Tutorial Files Used

hinge.idw hinge.ipt Cylinder Clamp.idw

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. It is likely that Archimedes created engineering drawings as early as 260 BC and da Vinci documented his designs in the 1500s using drawings. Although the common blueprint (in use since 1842) has faded from use, 3D digital prototypes are still documented using drawings. Often these drawings are for those people responsible for manufacturing. Digital drawing files today follow the standards defined for paper drawings. The creation of a design drawing remains the ultimate goal for a majority of engineers and designers. Prerequisites ■ Complete the Parts 2and Assemblies tutorials.

207

■

Understand the basics of the technical drawing process and industry standards, such as ANSI, ISO, and so on.

■

Understand the material covered in the Help topic “Getting Started.”

■

Click Application Options on the Options panel of the Tools tab. On the Application Options dialog box, click the Drawing tab and uncheck the option Edit dimension when created.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 208)

Get Started 1 Open hinge.idw,located in \Tutorial Files\Cylinder Clamp.

This file contains a simple, two sheet drawing that you can refer to during the tutorial. Sheet:1 of the drawing contains four views of the part you

208 | Chapter 8 Drawings

will detail during the first part of this tutorial. Sheet:2 shows how the drawing would look after the addition of a section view, dimensions, and annotation. 2 To view Sheet:2, double-click the Sheet:2 node in the browser.

NOTE Although you can add sheets to any drawing you create, you do not typically add sheets containing the same views shown on other sheets. The second sheet in the supplied drawing is simply an easy way to reference incremental progress for this tutorial. You can leave this drawing open as you continue with the tutorial. In the next several steps, you will select a template to begin a new drawing and add front, left-side, top and isometric views to the drawing sheet. Previous (page 207) | Next (page 209)

Create a Drawing 1 Click New on the Application Menu. 2 Click the Metric tab, and then select ISO.idw. 3 Click OK.

Create a Drawing | 209

Autodesk Inventor opens an empty A3 drawing sheet with a generic border and title block. In the remaining steps, you place four views like the views you saw on Sheet:1 of the already open drawing.

4 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Base . 5 To specify a model, in the Drawing View dialog box, click Open an existing file. 6 Select hinge.ipt, and click Open. 7 Click a location on your sheet for your front view. Leave space between the view boundaries and the drawing border to allow for additional view and dimension placement. NOTE Before you place the base view, you can use options on the Drawing View dialog box to specify the base view properties. For this tutorial, you accept the system default values. Previous (page 208) | Next (page 211)

210 | Chapter 8 Drawings

View Projection After you place a base view, the Place Views tab ➤ Create panel

➤ Projected

command is activated by default.

To understand your view projection options, move your cursor in a circle around the front view boundary without clicking. Notice that Autodesk Inventor previews eight different projected views.

1 Click below your front view to place a top view. Notice that a temporary rectangle is placed, indicating the intended location of the new view. 2 Click to the right of your front view to place a left side view. Another temporary rectangle is placed. 3 Click below your front view and to the right of your top view. A temporary rectangle is placed for an isometric view. 4 Right click, and select Create. The three projected views that you positioned are now created. NOTE The ISO drafting standard specifies first-angle projection. The ANSI drafting standard specifies third-angle projection. Views are projected according to the standard specified by the template used to create drawings. Autodesk Inventor supplies templates for standards accepted world-wide. The supplied standards can be modified to suit your requirements.

View Projection | 211

Approximate layout of current drawing sheet with one base view and three projected views. Moving views is easy, if necessary. Just click and drag a drawing view while the red dotted view boundary displays. Dependent views will position relative to the parent view. At this point, you would likely begin adding dimensions to a simple part. However, for this part, add a section view. Previous (page 209) | Next (page 212)

Add a Section View 1 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section

. The Status Bar at the bottom left of the display screen prompts you to: Select a view or view sketch. 2 Click the left side view located to the right of the front or base view on your drawing sheet. You are prompted to enter the endpoints of the section line. Draw a vertical line that starts above the view geometry, extends below the view geometry, and passes through the middle of the part.

212 | Chapter 8 Drawings

3 To find the middle of the part, slowly move your cursor over the top-most line in the center portion of the part. When you reach the middle of that line, the cursor displays a green ball. Do not click yet!

4 Move your cursor slowly above the drawing view.

Add a Section View | 213

As you move upwards, notice the dotted line extending from your cursor to the middle of the part. This dotted line lets you know that you are aligned with the midpoint of the line that was located under the green ball. If you move too far to the right or the left as you move upwards, you are no longer aligned to that point, and the dotted line disappears. 5 With the dotted vertical line visible, click to select the top-most point of the section line. 6 Move your cursor straight down below the view. Your cursor indicates that the line is perpendicular to the part edge.

214 | Chapter 8 Drawings

7 While the perpendicular icon displays next to your cursor, click to select the end point of the section line. 8 Right-click, and select Continue. The Section View dialog box appears offering various options for defining, identifying, and scaling the section view. For this exercise, accept the default settings. 9 Move your cursor to the left of the front view, and click to place the section view and close the Section View dialog box.

Add a Section View | 215

During the creation of a section view, you can use Inventor ability to infer geometric relationships while you sketch your section line. In this example, you used a single, straight line. In other more complex cases, you will use a multi-segment line that passes through key points of multiple features.

A section view is created, and a label is positioned that identifies the view and indicates the view scale. This view label is optional and can be repositioned and edited after placement as required. 10 Move your cursor over the view label. When the label text changes to red, click and drag the label away from the view geometry to allow room for dimensions. You will now place dimensions and other annotation on your drawing. Previous (page 211) | Next (page 217)

216 | Chapter 8 Drawings

Place Centerlines and Center Marks 1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Symbols panel ➤ Centerline

. 2 Move your cursor over the center of the upper left hole in the section view. When the green-filled circle appears, indicating that you are directly over the center point, click to select the first point of your centerline. TIP After clicking on the Centerline command, you can optionally click to select the circle first. You can then more easily select the circle center with a second click.

3 Move your mouse to the right until you are over the center of the upper-right hole in the section view. When the green-filled circle appears, click to select the endpoint of your centerline.

Place Centerlines and Center Marks | 217

4 Right-click to display the context menu. 5 Select Create to complete the placement of the centerline.

6 Repeat steps 2-5 to place a similar centerline between these same two holes in the front view.

7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Symbols panel ➤ Center Mark

.

8 Move your cursor over the center of the cylindrical feature in the lower right of the section view. When the green-filled circle appears (to indicate that you are directly over the center point) click to place a center mark.

9 Repeat the previous step to place a center mark on the inside cylindrical radius and on these same locations in the front view.

218 | Chapter 8 Drawings

With centerlines and center marks in place, it is time to place dimensions. Previous (page 212) | Next (page 220)

Place Centerlines and Center Marks | 219

Place Dimensions

In this exercise, we use the general Dimension command. Autodesk Inventor also provides some unique dimensioning commands that are not covered in this tutorial. As you proceed, you may decide that a dimension (or other annotation) you placed is unsatisfactory. To delete a dimension or annotation that has already been placed, select the Undo command from the Quick Access toolbar. You can also select the dimension and press Del, or right-click and select Delete from the displayed context menu.

220 | Chapter 8 Drawings

NOTE The following steps assume that you canceled the Edit dimension when created selection on the Drawing tab of the Application Options dialog box as instructed in the Prerequisites for this tutorial. If you did not, you will see an Edit dialog box displayed after clicking to place each dimension. You can continue this tutorial without changing the default settings by always clicking OK when this dialog box displays. However, we recommend that you change the default. 1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel

➤ Dimension

.

2 Move your cursor over the top-most extent of the vertical center mark on the left-most hole in the section view. 3 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights, click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the left extent of your dimension.

4 Move your cursor over the top-most extent of the vertical center mark on the right-most hole in the section view. 5 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights, click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the right extent of your dimension.

Place Dimensions | 221

6 Notice that as you move your cursor, the dimension extension lines adjust. Click to position your dimension.

Although you placed a single dimension, the Dimension command is still active. 7 Move your cursor over the lower-most extent of the vertical center mark on the left-most hole in the section view.

222 | Chapter 8 Drawings

8 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights, click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the left extent of your dimension.

9 Move your cursor over the lower-most extent of the vertical line representing the cut material. 10 To select the right extent of your dimension, click when the line highlights and the green-filled circle appears.

Place Dimensions | 223

11 Move your cursor to select a position, and then click to place the 16-mm dimension.

224 | Chapter 8 Drawings

12 Continue to place horizontal and vertical dimensions on the section, front, left, and top views. Click the Esc key to terminate the dimension command. 13 After placing several dimensions, you may decide that you would like to move a dimension. With no command active, move your cursor over a dimension value that you would like to move. When the dimension highlights, click and drag the dimension value (up/down or left/right) to new location. You can also click and drag any of the green-filled circle edit handles to make other dimension edits.

Place Dimensions | 225

Previous (page 217) | Next (page 226)

Place Angular Dimensions 1 The general Dimension command is also used to place angular dimensions. On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Dimension. 2 Move your cursor over the angled line in the front view. When the line highlights, click to select the first side of the angle that you wish to dimension. For this selection, you do not have to locate a key point on the line. No green-filled circles must be located that infer the selection of the line midpoint or endpoint.

226 | Chapter 8 Drawings

3 Move your cursor over the bottom horizontal line. When the line highlights, click to select the second side of the angle that you want to dimension. Notice that the icon near the cursor indicates that your selection will create an angle dimension.

4 To understand your dimension options, drag your cursor in a circle and notice that you can place your angle dimension in one of four quadrants defined by the intersection of the two lines that you selected.

Place Angular Dimensions | 227

5 Click to place your angle dimension in the quadrant shown.

Previous (page 220) | Next (page 229)

228 | Chapter 8 Drawings

Radial and Reference Dimensions 1 The general Dimension command (which should still be active) is also used to place radial dimensions. Move your cursor over the right-most arc in the front view. Click when the arc geometry highlights.

2 Drag your cursor to place the radial dimension.

3 Move your cursor over the left-most arc in the front view. Move your cursor along the arc until the green-filled circle appears at the 270-degree position. It indicates that you located the left-most quadrant key point. Click to select the left-most point of what will be an overall reference dimension. CAUTION: The midpoint of the arc segment also displays a green-filled circle at approximately 290 degrees. Selecting the arc segment midpoint will not produce the appropriate dimension.

Radial and Reference Dimensions | 229

4 Move your cursor over the right-most arc in the front view. Move your cursor along the arc until the green-filled circle appears to indicate that you located the right-most quadrant key point. Click to select the right-most point of what will be an overall reference dimension.

5 Drag your cursor to place the overall dimension.

230 | Chapter 8 Drawings

TIP Dimensions, centerlines, and center marks can also be placed for holes and other features in isometric views. Previous (page 226) | Next (page 231)

Add a Hole Note 1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Feature Notes panel ➤ Hole

and Thread

.

2 Move your cursor near the 10 o’clock position of the left-most hole in your front view, and click to select the arrow location of your hole call out.

Add a Hole Note | 231

3 Drag your cursor to position the leader and dimension for your hole callout. Click to finalize the placement.

Your drawing should now appear like Sheet:2 on the previously opened hinge.idw. Before you continue by working within a partially complete assembly drawing, save your drawing. 4 With the drawing you created active, click Save As on the Application menu. 5 Type a name for your drawing in the File name field of the Save as dialog box.

232 | Chapter 8 Drawings

6 Click Save. By default, your drawing is saved in the Inventor IDW drawing format. If you routinely work with or send drawings to individuals using AutoCAD, consider saving your drawing in the DWG format. ■ With the drawing you created active, click Save As on the Application Menu. ■

Click the selection arrow on the Save as type field on the Save As dialog box.

■

Select Inventor drawing files (*.dwg) from the drop-down list.

■

You may want to change the name of the saved drawing or the location where you will save DWG files, but for this tutorial, simply click Save. 7 From the Application Menu, click Close All.

Open an Assembly Drawing In the next portion of the tutorial, you add a parts list, balloons, and notes to an assembly drawing. Assembly drawing views and dimensions are created and placed using the same steps that you just completed. They are not repeated in the remaining portion of the tutorial. 1 Click Open on the Application Menu. 2 Select Cylinder Clamp.idw in the Open dialog box, and click Open. A single sheet drawing opens that has three orthographic views and one isometric view of the cylinder clamp assembly used in the Parts 2 and Assemblies tutorials.

Open an Assembly Drawing | 233

Assembly drawings often contain numbered lists of component parts along with corresponding balloons which identify each part. In the next set of exercises, you place a parts list and balloons with corresponding numbers. Previous (page 231) | Next (page 234)

Place a Parts List 1 On the Annotate tab, Table panel, click Parts List. 2 The Parts List dialog box appears, and the view selection stage of the command is active. Move your cursor over the isometric view of the assembly. When the view highlights with a red dotted boundary, click to select the view.

234 | Chapter 8 Drawings

3 In the Parts List dialog box, select Parts Only from the BOM View drop-down list control in the BOM Settings and Properties area. 4 Click OK in the Parts List dialog box. A rectangle the size of the parts list appears attached to your cursor.

Place a Parts List | 235

You are now ready to move the parts list to a position on your drawing sheet. 5 Move the parts list so that it aligns with the upper left of the drawing border. Notice that when your cursor is over the drawing border, an icon appears indicating the connection point for the parts list.

236 | Chapter 8 Drawings

6 Click to accept the position of the parts list on your drawing sheet.

Place a Parts List | 237

Each item in the assembly is given a sequential item number in the parts list. You will now add balloons which use these item numbers. Previous (page 233) | Next (page 238)

Add Balloons 8 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Table panel, and then click the drop-down menu below Balloon.

.

9 On the drop-down menu, click Auto Balloon. 10 Move your cursor over the isometric view of the assembly. When the view highlights with a red dotted boundary, click to select the view. 11 Use the Balloon command to select individual components for ballooning. In this exercise, you select all the components in the view. Click above and to the left of the view geometry, and drag the mouse

238 | Chapter 8 Drawings

down and to the right. The pink rectangle should cover all the view geometry.

12 Release the mouse button to select all the view geometry.

Add Balloons | 239

13 Select the Around option in the Placement area in the Auto Balloon dialog box. 14 Enter a value of 5 mm in the Offset Spacing field in the Auto Balloon dialog box. 8 Click Select Placement in the Placement area in the Auto Balloon dialog box. 9 Move your cursor into the drawing sheet. As you move your cursor, the balloons arrange themselves closer or farther away from the view center. Vertical rows move based on the horizontal position of the cursor relative to the view center. Horizontal rows move based on the vertical position of the cursor relative to the view center. The following illustration shows four possible balloon positions using the Around option.

240 | Chapter 8 Drawings

10 Move your cursor to a position that most closely resembles the display in the lower-right quadrant of the image shown above. When your balloon spacing appears similar, click to display the balloon arrows. 11 Click OK in the Auto Balloon dialog box to accept and place the balloons and arrows. Previous (page 234) | Next (page 242)

Add Balloons | 241

Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders

Having placed many balloons automatically, you may decide to reposition one or more balloons or balloon leaders. In this case, the leader for balloon 1 (which identifies the base) needlessly crosses over the cylinder. In the following steps you move both the balloon and the leader arrow. 1 Move your mouse over balloon 1. The balloon and leader highlight, and a green edit handle appears in the balloon center. 2 Move your cursor over the green edit handle. When the move glyph appears next to your cursor, drag the balloon down towards balloon 7.

242 | Chapter 8 Drawings

3 Drag slowly over balloon 7 and then downwards. As you drag downwards, notice the vertical dotted line appears, indicating that your balloon position is aligned with balloon 7. 4 Release your mouse button to accept a new balloon position similar to that shown in the following illustration.

Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders | 243

Next, you adjust the leader arrowhead position.

244 | Chapter 8 Drawings

Previous (page 238) | Next (page 245)

Adjust the Leader Arrowhead Now that the balloon is in a better position, you will move the leader arrowhead to a position closer to the balloon. 1 Move your cursor over the end-most edit handle located at the arrowhead point of the leader from balloon 1.

2 When the move symbol appears next to the cursor, click and drag the location of the arrowhead point to the corner of the base closest to the balloon.

Adjust the Leader Arrowhead | 245

3 When the lines representing the bottom and side of the base highlight and the connection point icon appears next to your cursor, release your mouse button to select the new position for the arrowhead point. Next, you will place a few example notes. Previous (page 242) | Next (page 246)

Place Notes Every drawing contains text and annotation. This text may be attached to drawing geometry with an arrow leader or contained within a specific area of a title block or revision table. It can be a lengthy set of notes. To place text:

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text

246 | Chapter 8 Drawings

.

2 Placing text on a drawing requires you to specify a location and an approximate initial size of the area occupied by the block of text. Move your cursor to the empty area above the title block. Click and drag a rectangle approximately as shown in the following image:

NOTE For smaller amounts of text, your initial rectangle can be smaller. The size of the text boundary can be adjusted at any time after placement so getting it exactly correct is not critical. When you release the mouse button, the Format Text dialog box displays. In addition to some text formatting options, this dialog box contains a large text entry field located along the bottom of the dialog box. For many general notes, you can accept the text formatting defaults (which are specified by the active style for your drawing). 3 Enter text in the text entry field. Type NOTES:, then press Enter and continue to type 1. This is a note. Press Enter again and continue to type 2. This is another note. 4 Click OK to place the text you typed in the text entry field on the drawing sheet, within the area specified by your rectangle.

Place Notes | 247

5 Select another command, or click Esc to terminate the Text command. 6 Click the placed text.

248 | Chapter 8 Drawings

The text highlights and displays edit handles (green-filled circles). You can drag the entire text block to a new location or move your cursor over one of the eight edit handles to resize the text block boundaries. 7 With the text selected, right-click and select Edit Text from the context menu. The Format Text dialog box opens with the selected text in the entry field. You can highlight individual words and apply formatting (bold, italic, underline) or change font or size. 8 Click Save to save the Cylinder Clamp drawing. NOTE After clicking Save, you may be presented with the Save dialog box prompting you with: Do you want to save changes to ‘Cylinder Clamp.idw’ and its dependents? You can click the Yes to All button to save all the files associated with the assembly, or click No to All if you wish to save none. Click the OK button to save only the files changed in this exercise and close the dialog box. Congratulations! You have completed the Drawings tutorial. A brief summary follows.

Summary The Autodesk Inventor drawing environment contains a collection of commands – most of which were not discussed in this tutorial. Knowing how to use the fundamental methods to create basic drawings provides you with a foundation to explore the use of these other commands. The basic procedures covered in this tutorial include: ■ Projected and section view creation ■

Basic dimensioning

■

Placing basic notes

Previous (page 246)

Summary | 249

250

Drawing Styles and Standards

9

About this tutorial

Open a drawing and modify the drawing styles for dimensions. Apply the styles to dimensions and modify the display of hatch patterns. Category

New Users

Time Required

45 minutes

251

Tutorial File Used

Cylinder Body Sub-Assembly.idw

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. A drawing communicates a design, and must do so in a way that other people can understand. The drawings from every company follow some combination of rules from national, industry, or internal standards. In this tutorial, you change the style of the open drawing and load information from the style library. The project file references the style library that contains the data to load into the drawing. Prerequisites ■ Complete the Drawings tutorial. Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 252)

Set the project and open the Tutorial File Inventor stores styles in documents (local styles) and in the style library (library styles). The Use Style Library setting in the project determines whether styles in the style library are open for edit. The Read-Only status ensures that all style edits are kept in the local document.

1 With all Inventor files closed, click 2

➤ Manage ➤ Projects.

In the lower pane of the Projects dialog box, confirm that the Use Style Library setting is Read-Only. If it is set to Read-Write, right-click the setting, and select Read-Only. Then click Save.

252 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

NOTE Read-Only status enables sharing styles in model or drawing documents. When styles in the library change, CAD administrator can update all documents to use the new library styles. 3 Click Done to close the Projects dialog box. 4 In the Tutorial Files > Cylinder Clamp folder, open Drawing Styles.idw.

Previous (page 251) | Next

Annotation Styles Drawing styles control the appearance of drawing annotations. The default styles delivered with Inventor comply with national and international standards such as ANSI, ISO, and GB. You can modify the styles to meet the requirements of your company. For example, if you have a text style that uses a large font, you can use that style to override the appearance of notes. This drawing was created using the ISO standard. Although most of the annotations follow the standard, some changes are required. In this exercise, you create a dimension style that uses a period instead of a comma for the decimal marker.

Annotation Styles | 253

1 Click the Manage tab ➤ Styles and Standards group ➤ Styles Editor. The Style and Standard Editor dialog box displays. Each drawing contains the style information that controls the display of the annotations. In addition, the drawing can contain styles that are not used. The style library can store all the styles your company uses. To reduce file size, there are more styles in the style library than in a drawing. For example, styles for weldments only are not included in most drawings. The dialog box has a style tree list on the left side. The tree list has a node for each type of annotation. If you click a node, it expands to display the styles. Some annotations have only one style, while others have several. 2 Expand the Dimension node in the browser, and select Default (ISO). 3 To create a dimension style based on the Default (ISO) style, click New… 4 In the New Local Style dialog box, in Name, enter Modified (ISO). Clear the Add to Standard setting, and click OK. The new style is added to browser under the Dimension node. NOTE Add to Standard controls whether to include the style in the active standard. You do not use this style in the default standard. 5 In Decimal Marker, change the setting to . Period, as shown in the following image.

254 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

6 Click Save. NOTE Each style is a separate collection of settings. Save changes before you switch to a different style. Previous (page 252) | Next (page 255)

Object Defaults and Standards An object default style is a collection of all annotation types and their default settings. A standard contains settings for views, text, object defaults, and hatches. In this topic, you create an object default style and a standard, and use them to control the appearance of the drawing.

Object Defaults and Standards | 255

1 Expand the Object Defaults node and select Object Defaults (ISO). Click New, and in Name,enter Modified Object Defaults (ISO). Clear Add to Standard. NOTE The Add to Standard behavior for object default styles differs from annotation styles. If Add to Standard is selected, the new object default becomes active for the standard. 2 Set the filter to Dimension Objects. 3 Change the Object Style for all dimension types that use the Default (ISO) to Modified (ISO), as shown in the following image.

256 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

4 Click Save. Expand the Standard node, select Default Standard (ISO), and create a standard named Modified Standard (ISO). On the Available Styles tab, select Dimension ➤ Modified (ISO) style. On the Object Defaults tab, set Active Object Defaults to Modified Object Defaults (ISO). Click Save, and double-click Modified Standard (ISO). The standard name changes to bold type to indicate it is active.

Object Defaults and Standards | 257

5 Click Done. Newly created dimensions use the Modified Standard (ISO). TIP To update existing dimensions, select the dimensions in the graphic window. Then on the ribbon, select Modified Standard (ISO) from the Style list on the Annotate tab ➤ Format panel.

258 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

Previous (page 253) | Next (page 259)

Override Annotation Styles In some cases, the appearance of certain annotations is wrong, and you do not want all the annotations to have this appearance. In this topic, you create a style that hides trailing zeros.

1 Right-click and select Repeat Style and Standard Editor.… 2 Expand the Dimension node, right-click Modified (ISO), and select New Style. In Name, enter Modified- No Trailing Zeros (ISO) NOTE Do not clear the Add to Standard selection. Modified Standard (ISO) is active, and you want to add this style to it. 3 On the Units tab ➤ Display group, clear the selection of Trailing Zeros. Click Save, and Done. 4 Select the hole notes in the base view.

Override Annotation Styles | 259

5 On the Annotate tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Style List, click ModifiedNo Trailing Zeros (ISO).

Previous (page 255) | Next (page 260)

Hatch Styles Hatch patterns are used in section views, and to fill in the profiles in sketches. Most standards specify the use of a single hatch pattern, and the angle of the pattern is automatically changed on individual parts in assembly section views. Some companies use different hatch patterns for different materials to help differentiate them. In this exercise, you learn how to map hatch patterns to materials, import a custom hatch pattern, and override the appearance of a hatch pattern.

260 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

1 Zoom into view A-A. Since it is a view of a single part, all profiles have the same hatch pattern. 2 On the Manage tab, click Styles and Standards group ➤ Styles Editor. Expand the Standard node and select Modified Standard (ISO).

Hatch Styles | 261

3 Click the Material Hatch Pattern Defaults tab. The default hatch pattern is set to ANSI 31, and no materials are listed. Click the From Style Library icon to import the materials from the style library. All materials are listed, and they are all mapped to the default hatch pattern. NOTE If materials do not display, confirm that the style library setting in the project is Read Only. Scroll down to Steel, Mild and click the hatch pattern. The drop-down menu lists ANSI 31, several ISO hatch patterns, and Other… . 4 Click Other... to display the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box. This dialog box controls which hatch patterns are available in the drawing. Select ANSI 32 and click OK. The ANSI 32 steel hatch pattern is now available, but it is not set as the default hatch pattern for the Steel, Mild material. Click the hatch pattern dropdown menu again, and select ANSI 32. Click Save, and Done. Even though we set ANSI 32 as the default hatch pattern, the section view does not update. Once you map hatch patterns to materials, new section views automatically use those patterns. For existing views, Edit the pattern and set the By Material option. Right-click the pattern, and select Pattern ➤ By Material The section view updates to use the ANSI 32 hatch pattern, as shown in the following image.

262 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

The spacing on the hatch pattern is too close for this part cross-section. 5 Right-click on the pattern and select Edit… . By Material is selected and Pattern is disabled. Change the Scale to 2, and click OK.

Hatch Styles | 263

The hatch pattern updates as shown in the following image.

6 Previous (page 259) | Next (page 265)

264 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

Custom Hatch Styles Some companies use custom hatch patterns to indicate a special material, surface finish, or to highlight an area for a manufacturing instruction. You can import AutoCAD standard pattern files into Inventor. 1 Open the Style and Standard Editor and create a hatch style called Modified Hatch (ISO). On the Pattern dropdown list, select Other… . In the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box, select Load... In the Tutorial Files ➤ Cylinder Clamp folder, select Sample.pat, and click Open. Two hatch patterns are available in that file- Sample1 and Sample2. Select Sample1, and click OK to close the Load Hatch Pattern dialog box. Click OK again to close the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box Sample1 is now the active hatch pattern for this style. The image is a representation of the hatch pattern, but it is not a preview. The pattern lines are at an angle, and Angle reads 45 degrees. 2 Change Angle to 0 degrees. The image does not update. The Sample1 hatch pattern is defined with the crosshatch lines at 27 and 48 degree angles. The default Angle setting shifts the pattern by 45 degrees. By changing Angle to 0 degrees, the pattern appears in the drawing the way it was created. Click Save, and click Done. 3 Click View A-A. On the Annotate tab, click Sketch Group ➤ Create Sketch. In the Draw group, click Project Geometry, and then select the four lines in the middle of the view. Click Done (ESC). On the Sketch tab, in Draw group, click Fill/Hatch Region, and then click in the profile defined by the projected lines. 4 In the Hatch/Color Fill dialog box, click the Hatch button to enable the hatch controls. In the Pattern list, select Sample1. The pattern displays in the sketch. Although you selected the sample1 pattern, the rest of the settings did not update. The previous Angle setting does not work well with this pattern, so experiment with different angles. In Angle, enter 90 degrees, and click OK. The dialog box closes. Click Finish Sketch to return to the drawing. The section view resembles the following image.

Custom Hatch Styles | 265

NOTE Note If you do not select the view before you create the sketch, the sketch is created on the sheet instead of the view. You cannot project view geometry into a sheet sketch.

266 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

Previous (page 260) | Next (page 267)

Summary

The Autodesk Inventor drawing environment supports extensive drawing customization. Knowing how to use the Style and Standard Editor to customize dimension and hatch appearance provides you with a foundation to explore annotation customization further. The basic procedures covered in this tutorial include: ■ Creating and modifying styles, object defaults, and standards. ■

Setting style defaults.

■

Overriding styles.

Previous (page 265)

Summary | 267

268

10

iLogic Basics

About this tutorial

Create rules-based models. Category

New Users

269

Time Required

40 minutes

Tutorial File Used

bracket_no_rules.ipt

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. iLogic extends the computational capabilities within Autodesk Inventor to include rules. These rules work with the parameter update mechanism of Autodesk Inventor and allow you to include much more sophisticated design intent into your models. In traditional parametric modeling, dimensional parameters drive geometry. Parameter values can be input directly by the user, or they can result from fixed equations involving other parameters or even linked spreadsheet values. Using rules in a parametric model allows for conditionally defined equations. Conditional equations can involve all aspects of the design. Equations or relationships can be defined between the parameters, properties, attributes, features, components, or any other aspect of the design. Defining the relationships between all objects in a design makes it possible to update the model completely, correctly, and automatically when input parameter values are changed. Objectives ■ Become familiar with important iLogic concepts. ■

Create rules and parameters that control the modeling of a simple part.

Prerequisites ■ Familiarity with Autodesk Inventor, and its basic part modeling functionality and concepts. ■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 271)

270 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

Prepare to Add Parameters In addition to the familiar numeric parameters available in Autodesk Inventor, you can create text and true/false parameters and then use them to control your model. In the following lessons, you create additional parameters in your model for later use in iLogic rules. 1 With Autodesk Inventor open, set your active project to iLogic 2012 Tutorials. 2 Open the file bracket_no_rules.ipt.

3 Use the Save As command to save this document as a new file named bracket.ipt. This open document is your working file for the tutorial.

4

On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤ Parametersto display the Parameters dialog box, which serves as the editor for all Autodesk Inventor parameters.

Prepare to Add Parameters | 271

5 Click the Filters icon at the bottom of the dialog box. Select the All option to ensure that all parameters associated with the bracket model are displayed. Previous (page 269) | Next (page 272)

Create a Numeric Parameter 1 Select Add Numeric from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the dialog box. A new row is created at the bottom of the parameter list, and the cursor is positioned in the Parameter Name cell for that row. 2 Enter the name mass, and then click the Unit cell to display the Unit Type dialog box. 3 Expand the Mass node, and select lbmass. NOTE Parameter names in iLogic are case sensitive. Please be sure to follow the case being used in the Parameters dialog box, and while creating rules. 4 Enter 100 in the Equation cell, then click in another cell in the row and observe 100.000000 in the Nominal Value field. 5 Select the check box in the Key cell of this parameter to make it a Key parameter. Previous (page 271) | Next (page 272)

Create a Text Parameter With the Parameters dialog box still open: 1 Select Add Text from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the dialog box. 2 Enter the name holes in the empty Parameter Name cell at the bottom of the parameter list. 3 Right-click in one of the cells of the row to display the contextual menu containing the options Make Multi-Value and Delete Parameter. 4 Select Make Multi-Value to open the Value List Editor dialog box.

272 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

5 In the Add New Items field at the top of the dialog box, enter base, flange, and none. Make sure to press Enter after each item to place it on its own line. 6 Click Add to transfer the new items to the Value field at the bottom of the dialog box.

(1) Enter your items here. (2) Click Add. (3) Observe items added as values.

7 Click OK to accept these values and close the Value List Editor dialog box. In the Equation cell of the holes parameter, click the drop-down arrow to see the three string values you added.

Create a Text Parameter | 273

8 Select the flange choice. Notice that as you change the value of the hole parameter to flange, it also changes in the Equation field. 9 Select Key checkbox of this parameter to make it a Key parameter. Previous (page 272) | Next (page 274)

Create a True-False Parameter Now we create a parameter to control use of the chamfer feature on the bracket part. 1 Select Add True/False from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the dialog box. 2 Enter the name chamfers in the empty Parameter Name cell at the bottom of the parameter list. 3 Click in the Equation cell and notice that a drop-down menu appears, with True and False as the available options.

4 Select the Key check box to make the chamfer parameter a Key parameter. 5 Click Done to close the Parameter dialog box and complete the parameter creation process. Previous (page 272) | Next (page 275)

274 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

Set Parameter Filters The Parameters dialog box includes filters to control which parameters are displayed. Filters help you focus on specific parameters. 1 Open the Parameters dialog box, and expand the dialog box window to show all the parameters associated with the bracket. Click the Filters icon in the bottom left corner of the dialog to view a list of the filters you can use to restrict the parameter list. 2 Select the check box in the Key field of each of the following Model parameters to set them as Key parameters. ■ base_hole_length_loc ■

base_hole_width_loc

■

base_hole_dia

■

flange_hole_dia

■

flange_hole_length_loc

■

flange_hole_width_loc

3 Click the various choices in the list of filters. Notice how the list of displayed parameters changes. ■

All shows all parameters.

■

Key shows only key parameters.

■

Non-Key shows only non-key parameters.

■

Renamed shows only those parameters that the user renamed.

■

Equation shows only those parameters involved in an equation.

4 Close the Parameters dialog box. This simple bracket model has 28 parameters associated with it. It is not unreasonable to expect that a complex part or assembly of parts may have hundreds of parameters. By strategically designating Key parameters, it is possible to find relevant parameters much more easily by filtering the list. Previous (page 274) | Next (page 276)

Set Parameter Filters | 275

Create Feature Suppression Rule With the necessary parameters in place, we can now add logic to the model using rules. Rules can be defined for various actions, including setting the values of parameters and activating or suppressing features. Our first rule suppresses a feature on a part.

Rule Editor

On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ iLogic panel ➤ Add

1 Rule.

2 Enter Modify_Feature in the Name field of the Rule Name dialog box, and click OK to display the Edit Rule dialog box. The Edit Rule dialog box is the heart of the iLogic functionality. You use this dialog box to create and edit iLogic rules. 3 Select the Model tab. The top left panel of this window includes a view of the Model tree. Click the Model Parameters node in the tree. Notice that the top right panel now lists only the Model parameters.

To see other sets of parameters, you can click the User Parameters node in the model tree to display only the manually created parameters. You write rules in the rule text area, which is located in the bottom panel of the Edit Rule dialog box. You can enter Rule keywords by typing them

276 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

directly into the text entry field. Or, you can select generic statements from the toolbar above the field and then editing the statements.

This tutorial describes entering the statements manually, unless otherwise indicated. 4 Click the User Parameters node to display the User parameters. The bracket model includes two holes: one in the base, and one on the flange.

(1) flange hole (2) base hole

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 277

Our new rule turns on (or off) the base hole, the flange hole, or both. In a previous lesson, we created a multi-value parameter named holes. We assigned three values to this parameter labeled base, flange and none. The rule turns on the flange hole when flange value is selected. Choosing base turns on the base hole, and a value of none turns off both holes

Add Parameters to Rule Now we can create the rule. We begin with the flange setting of the holes parameter. 1 Enter If in the text box, followed by a space. Notice that the text of the If keyword turns bold and red. The red color indicates a recognized language element (in this case a keyword). 2 In the Model tree, click the User Parameters node, then double-click holes to insert the holes parameter name into the editor. 3 Type = , followed by a space, and then type “flange” (be sure to include quotation marks). Add another space, and type Then to finish this line. Notice that the different colors are applied automatically to the different language elements of the expression defined so far. This color coding makes rules much easier to read, and it helps you quickly comprehend their meaning, and identify any information entered incorrectly.

4 Press Enter to move to the next line. We can make the flange hole active by using an iLogic function.

Insert Code Snippets 1 In the Snippets area on the left side of the editor, click the System tab. Expand the Features node, then double-click the IsActive choice to insert its text into the rule editor.

278 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

2 Click the Model tab at the top of the Edit Rule dialog box, and click flange_hole in the Model tree. 3 Click the Names tab in the top right corner of the dialog box, and notice that flange_hole now appears here. 4 Highlight featurename in the rule text, and then double-click flange_hole in the Names tab to replace featurename with flange_hole.

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 279

(1) Highlight generic text. (2) Double-click name to replace highlighted text.

The Feature.IsActive function sets the activity state (suppression state) of a feature specified in quotation marks inside the parentheses. 5 To assign a value of True, first insert a space at the end of the statement. After the space, enter =, followed by another space, and then the word True. Assigning a value of True indicates that the flange hole is active (unsuppressed). When the flange option is chosen for the holes parameter, we want only the flange hole active. We must include a command that deactivates the base hole. 6 At the end of your rule text, press Enter to move to the next line, and then insert another Feature.IsActive(“featurename”) function. 7 Highlight the featurename string and click base_hole in the Model tree. Then double-click base_hole in the Name tab to replace featurename with base_hole, and assign a value of False. These two lines turn on the flange hole and turn off the base hole. Your rule now consists of three lines.

280 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

Copy Code Block If holes = "flange" Then Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") = True Feature.IsActive("base_hole") = False For instances in which the base hole must be activated, a similar strategy is employed. We must activate the base hole and deactivate the flange hole.

Reuse Code Blocks To create the next part of the rule, you copy and paste the reusable portion of the previous statements. Then change the pasted text as required. 1 Press Enter to insert a new line, and then enter ElseIf. 2 Highlight the reusable text, which includes everything after the word If, and press Ctrl + C to copy the text to the clipboard. Then, position the cursor after ElseIf, and press Ctrl + V to paste it. NOTE You can also Cut, Copy, and Paste by right-clicking selected text and selecting the appropriate command from a context menu. It also contains other editing commands. Or, you can use the icons in the editing toolbar above the rule text area. 3 In the newly pasted text, change flange to base, and switch the True and False conditions.

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 281

Copy Code Block If holes= ”flange” Then Feature.IsActive(“flange_hole”) Feature.IsActive(“base_hole") = ElseIf holes = “base” Then Feature.IsActive(“flange_hole”) Feature.IsActive(“base_hole”) =

= True False = False True

4 Add another ElseIf statement, and use the same copy and paste method to create the third part of this rule, where no holes are required. Modify the newly pasted text to suppress both hole features when the holes parameter is set to none. 5 Finish the statement by typing End If (or clicking the corresponding keyword button). The rule is complete.

Copy Code Block If holes = "flange" Then Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") Feature.IsActive("base_hole") = ElseIf holes = "base" Then Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") Feature.IsActive("base_hole") = ElseIf holes = "none" Then

282 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

= True False = False True

Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") = False Feature.IsActive("base_hole") = False End If 6 Click OK on the Edit Rule dialog box. If there are no mistakes, the dialog box closes without an error message. An icon representing the new rule appears in the Rule Browser.

7

To verify the new rule, click Manage tab ➤ iLogic panel ➤ Rule Browser and view the tree.

The Rule Browser provides a way for you to see the rules in the current model. We explore the Rule Browser further later in this tutorial.

Test the Feature Suppression Rule 1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤ Parameters to display the Parameters dialog box. 2 Click the node icon to the left of the Model Parameters area to collapse the list of Model parameters. 3 Click in the Equation field of the holes parameter to enable the multi-value drop-down arrow. Then click the arrow and select flange from the drop-down menu.

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 283

4 Click any other cell and observe the bracket. The only hole shown is the flange hole.

5 Change the multi-value selection to base, and click another cell. Only the base hole is shown.

284 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

6 Finally, change the multi-value selection to none, and click another cell. No holes are visible.

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 285

7 Click Done to close the Parameters dialog box.

Rename the Feature Suppression Rule The rule we created requires a more descriptive name.

1

On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ iLogic panel ➤ Rule Browser.

2 In the tree, click Modify_Feature once to highlight the rule, then click it again to enable edit mode. 3 Rename the rule to Hole_Rule, and press Enter. 4 Close the Rule Browser. Previous (page 275) | Next (page 287)

286 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

Create Feature Activation Rule Now, we create a second rule to control the activation of the chamfers on the bracket. Previously, we created a Boolean-type parameter labeled chamfers. The two possible values for a Boolean parameter are True and False. We will use these values to turn chamfers on and off.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ iLogic panel ➤ Add

1 Rule.

2 Name the new rule Chamfer_Rule, and click OK to open the Edit Rule dialog box. The first part of the rule states that if the value for the Boolean parameter chamfers is true, then the chamfers feature is activated. 3 Enter the If statement for this rule.

Copy Code Block If chamfers = True Then 4 From the Snippets area, insert a copy of the IsActive snippet (Feature.IsActive) into your rule. In the inserted snippet, replace featurename with Chamfers, and set the statement to True.

Copy Code Block If chamfers = True Then Feature.IsActive("Chamfers") = True The second part of the rule states that when the value of the chamfers parameter is False, the chamfers are deactivated. 5 Add an Else statement, and use the Copy and Paste commands to create the second part of the rule. Complete the rule with an End If statement.

Create Feature Activation Rule | 287

Copy Code Block If chamfers = True Then Feature.IsActive("Chamfers") = True ElseFeature.IsActive("Chamfers") = False End If The rule is complete. 6 Click OK to accept the rule. If no error messages appear, the rule can be tested.

Test the Feature Activation Rule

1

On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤ Parameters.

2 In the chamfers row, click in the Equation field to enable the multi-value drop-down, then click the arrow and select False. Notice that all chamfers are deactivated.

288 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

3 Now, change your Equation selection to True. The chamfers are activated. Previous (page 276) | Next (page 289)

Create Dimension Rule The third rule we create controls the dimensions of the bracket. Previously, we created a user parameter labeled mass. Our new rule modifies the width of the bracket based on the value of this parameter. In the first scenario, the width of the bracket changes according to the following values. Mass

Bracket Width

100

1 in

200

2 in

300

3 in

Create Dimension Rule | 289

Mass

Bracket Width

400

4 in

Add Values First, we add the set of possible values for the mass parameter. Use the menus in the Filters area to display only the Key parameters in the list. This filter makes it easier to focus in on the mass parameter. 1 Right-click in any empty cell in the mass row, and select Make Multi-Value from the context menu. The Value List Editor opens. 2 In the Add New Item(s) field, add the values 200, 300, and 400 (the value of 100 should already be in the Value list). 3 Click Add button to populate the Value list, and then click OK to accept the list and return to the Parameters dialog box. You can click the drop-down menu in the Multivalue field of the mass row in the Parameter Editor to see the list of values. 4 Click Done to complete the modification of the mass parameter.

Add the Rule Next, we create a rule to control the bracket width.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ iLogic panel ➤ Add

1 Rule.

2 Name the new rule Width_Rule. The first part of our rule states that if the mass is 100, the bracket width is 1 inch. 3 In the rule text area of the Edit Rule dialog box, begin the rule with an If statement. 4 Click the Model Parameters node in the Model tree, then locate the parameter labeled bracket_width under the Parameters tab to the right of the tree.

290 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

5 Double-click bracket_width to insert the parameter name into the rule text. Although parameter names can be directly typed into the rule, double-clicking from the list eliminates the possibility of spelling errors. 6 Set the bracket_width to 1 inch.

Copy Code Block If mass = 100 Then bracket_width = 1 NOTE You can specify units in iLogic numeric expressions (for example, “1 in”). However, the examples in this tutorial do not follow this convention. When units are omitted, the units specified in the properties of the model document are assumed. The second part of our rule states that if the mass is 200, the bracket width is 2 inches. 7 Use an ElseIf statement to set the bracket_width to 2 inches when the mass is 200.

Copy Code Block If mass = 100 bracket_width ElseIf mass = bracket_width

Then = 1 200 Then = 2

8 Add two more ElseIf statements to accommodate the remaining values of 300 and 400. 9 End the rule with an End If statement. The rule is complete.

Create Dimension Rule | 291

Copy Code Block If mass = 100 bracket_width ElseIf mass = bracket_width ElseIf mass = bracket_width ElseIf mass = bracket_width End If

Then = 1 200 Then = 2 300 Then = 3 400 Then = 4

10 Click OK to save this new rule.

Test the Rule

1

Open the Parameters dialog box.

2 Set the value of the mass parameter to 100. Notice that bracket_width is set to 1 inch.

292 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

3 Change the mass parameter value to 200, and notice that the bracket width changes again.

Create Dimension Rule | 293

If you change the mass to 300, the width of the bracket increases to 3 inches. A mass of 400 results in a width of 4 inches. Try it! Previous (page 287) | Next (page 294)

Test for Range of Values What if the mass is not limited to exact values, but instead can occur in several ranges of values? Consider the following examples: Mass range

Width

Less than or equal to 100

1 in

Greater than 100 but less than or equal to 200

2 in

Greater than 200 but less than or equal to 300

3 in

294 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

Mass range

Width

Greater than 300 but less than or equal to 400

4 in

Greater than 400

6 in

We can change an existing rule to accommodate these ranges. 1 Open the Rules Browser, and double-click Width_Rule to open the rule in the Edit Rule dialog box. 2 Modify the rule as shown.

Copy Code Block If mass 100 And mass 200 And mass 300 And mass >) to expand the dialog box, and then type Insert In1 in the Name field. 9 Click OK. The iMate is created in the part. 10 Click the Return command to return to the parent assembly. Previous (page 335) | Next (page 338)

Place Content Manually Using iMates 1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Place from Content Center. 2 Click History on the toolbar. The History panel displays. It includes the previously placed Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric part family.

338 | Chapter 12 Content Center

3 Right-click the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric family, and select Navigate to Category. The family displays and selected in the List View. 4 Switch off the Table View panel. 5 Hold down the Alt key, and double-click the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric family to place a member of the family in the assembly. 6 In the Family dialog box, select the same family member as you placed previously: select M6 from the Thread Description list, and then select 30 from the Nominal Length list. 7 Select Use iMate, and then click OK. The selected cap screw previews in place (honoring the specified Insert iMate).

8 Click anywhere in the graphics window to place the cap screw.

Place Content Manually Using iMates | 339

9 Right-click, and select Done.

Previous (page 336) | Next (page 340)

Use AutoDrop AutoDrop enhances placement techniques with functional design automation. It automatically checks geometry for placement and sizing based on the content family characteristics. Place head cap screws to the remaining mounting holes of the Housing part by using AutoDrop. 1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Place from Content Center. 2 Use Search to find available head cap screws: ■ Insert the Head Cap Screw string in the Search For box of the Quick Search panel.

340 | Chapter 12 Content Center

■

Click Search Now.

3 On the Search Results panel, locate the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw. Right-click it, and select Navigate to Category. The family displays and selected in the List View. 4 Double-click the DIN 6912 family. The graphics window with the assembly displays. 5 Position your cursor over an empty mounting hole as shown:

6 Click to display the AutoDrop toolbar. AutoDrop determines that multiple placements of a selected component would be desired. Notice that the circular top edge of each of the other mounting holes highlights to indicate where AutoDrop places additional components. NOTE The Insert Multiple option on the toolbar controls how multiple components are placed.

Use AutoDrop | 341

7 Drag the red arrow on the screw preview to change the nominal length of the screw to 30 mm. NOTE When you drag the red arrow, a tooltip shows the entire size of the component. 8 Select Apply on the AutoDrop toolbar to place three cylinder head cap screws. 9 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Done to finish the command.

342 | Chapter 12 Content Center

Previous (page 338) | Next (page 343)

Resize Standard Content 1 In the graphics window or browser, right-click the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric part, and then select Change Size. The family dialog box displays. 2 Select 45 from the Nominal Length list, and click OK. The selected cap screw resizes to the new length.

Resize Standard Content | 343

Previous (page 340) | Next (page 344)

Replace Standard Content 1 In the graphics window or browser, right-click one of the occurrences of the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw, and then select Replace from Content Center. The Replace from Content Center dialog box displays, and the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw is selected. 2 On the List View panel, select the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric located in the same category, and click OK. 3 In the family dialog box, select M6 from the Thread Description list, and select 45 from the Nominal Length list. 4 Select Replace All to replace all occurrences of the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw.

344 | Chapter 12 Content Center

5 Click OK on the family dialog box. Then click OK on the message box. All occurrences of the selected screw are replaced.

Previous (page 343) | Next (page 345)

Summary

Summary | 345

In this tutorial, you learned how to: ■ Review the library configuration in the project. ■

Work with the Place from Content Center dialog box.

■

Find a part family by using the Content Center browser, Search, and History.

■

Select a family member (part) and place it in an assembly.

■

Use iMates to place a part from Content Center.

■

Place a Content Center part by using AutoDrop.

■

Change the size of a placed Content Center part.

■

Replace a part with another part from the Content Center library.

Remember to check Help for further detailed information. What Next? Use a procedure from this tutorial to place a bearing in the assembly. Read more about Content Center in Help. Continue with the Content Center User Libraries tutorial. Previous (page 344)

346 | Chapter 12 Content Center

13

Sketch Blocks

About this tutorial

Define sketch blocks and use them in assemblies. Category

New Users

Time Required

40 minutes

Tutorial File Used

Car Seat Sketch Blocks.ipt

347

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. Define sketch blocks to capture geometric configurations as a fixed set, and place instances of the set into an assembly layout. In many assembly designs, geometric configurations are repeated. For example, you can group 2D sketch geometry into a sketch block that represents a car seat screw assembly. You can place instances of the block into your assembly layout. The instances are defined in the sketch block. Any changes to the block design are automatically reflected by the instances. You could create nested sketch blocks to represent the car screw assembly and place flexible instances of these blocks into your layout. These flexible instances retain specified degrees of freedom that allow them to simulate the kinematics of the screw assembly. You start this tutorial in an existing part with 2D sketch geometry. Objectives ■ Create, edit, and format sketch blocks. ■

Demonstrate kinematics with sketch blocks.

Prerequisites ■ Know how to set the , navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding. ■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 348)

Get Started Open Car Seat Sketch Blocks in Autodesk Inventor.

1 Click

348 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

➤ Open.

2 Open Car Seat Sketch Blocks.ipt. Previous (page 347) | Next (page 349)

Create Sketch Blocks

After you open the part file, note the presence of one sketch, Sketch1, in the Model browser. Click Sketch1 and you see all geometry in the graphics

Create Sketch Blocks | 349

window highlighted. You can use one 2D sketch to create all your geometry then group the appropriate geometry into sketch blocks. 1 Use navigation commands, such as View Face and Zoom Window, to position the sketch geometry in the graphics window as shown. 2 Double-click Sketch1 in the Model browser.

3 Window-select the lowermost geometry, and click Create Block in the Layout Panel on the Sketch tab.

NOTE You can pre-select geometry and activate the Create Block command, or you can activate the command and select geometry. 4 For Block Name, enter Worm Gear Assy. You can also define the insert point and add a description. The insert point is where the sketch block is attached to the cursor when block instances are placed. 5 Click OK. The sketch block is created. 6 Expand Sketch1 in the Model browser. Pause the cursor over the sketch block instance , Worm Gear Assy:1. The associated sketch geometry highlights in the graphics window. Create Block creates a sketch block definition in the Blocks folder and replaces the original 2D sketch geometry with an instance of the block. Expand the Blocks folder to view the Worm Gear Assy block definition node.

350 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

7 You can create multiple sketch blocks without closing the Create Block dialog box. Click Create Block on the Sketch tab, and select the geometry shown. Enter Connecting Rod as the Name, and click Apply. The block is created, and the dialog box awaits selection of geometry for the next block.

8 Select the geometry shown, and create the Link Plate sketch block.

9 Select the geometry shown, and create the Pivot Plate sketch block.

Create Sketch Blocks | 351

10 Exit the sketch, and save your file. Previous (page 348) | Next (page 352)

Edit Sketch Blocks You edit sketch block definitions either in-context or out-of-context. The benefit of the in-context edit is the ability to add existing active sketch geometry or blocks to the block definition. With both methods, you can add new sketch geometry to the block. Regardless of how the sketch block definition is edited, the changes are propagated to all instances of the block. NOTE You cannot edit a sketch block instance independent of the block definition. 1 Open Sketch1 for edit. 2 Create a rectangle that intersects the Worm Gear Assy geometry.

352 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

3 Exit the sketch. 4 Expand the Blocks folder, and double-click the Worm Gear Assy definition. The block definition opens for edit in the graphics window, but the newly created rectangle geometry is absent. It is because the edit is out-of-context of the sketch. You can make new geometry to add, but geometry that exists outside the block definition is not available. 5 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. 6 Open Sketch1 for edit. 7 Double-click block instance Worm Gear Assy:1, or right-click on the instance and select Edit Block. It opens the Worm Gear Assy block definition for edit in the context of Sketch1. The newly created rectangle geometry is exposed to the block definition. 8 Select the rectangle geometry you created. Hold down the Ctrl key, and click the four lines of the rectangle. When all four lines are selected, right-click and select Add To Block.

NOTE If you had created new geometry during the block edit, the new geometry is automatically added to the block definition. 9 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Sketch1 browser node to finish editing the block and return to the sketch. 10 To illustrate that the block definition has changed, drag and drop the Worm Gear Assy block definition (from the Blocks folder) into the graphics window. Worm Gear Assy:2, another instance of Worm Gear Assy, is created showing the rectangle geometry you added when you edited the block definition in-context.

Edit Sketch Blocks | 353

11 Exit Sketch1. 12 Double-click the Worm Gear Assy block definition under Blocks. It opens the Worm Gear Assy block definition out-of context. 13 Delete the rectangle geometry you previously added. 14 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. Both instances of Worm Gear Assy are updated to show the geometry was removed.

354 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

Previous (page 349) | Next (page 355)

Format Sketch Blocks You can apply specific geometric properties to sketch block definitions and instances. The geometric properties active in a sketch block definition are the default properties for the instances. However, as with other sketch geometry, you can override the default format for the sketch block instances. Use this functionality to differentiate between specific instances in your sketch. 1 Right-click the Worm Gear Assy block definition in the Blocks folder, and select Properties. 2 Select Magenta for Line Color, and click OK. Both Worm Gear Assy instances turn magenta to reflect the new default format.

Format Sketch Blocks | 355

3 Now, override the default format. Right-click the Worm Gear Assy:1 instance, and select Properties. 4 Select Blue for Line Color and click OK, then click in the graphics window to clear the selection. The instance is now blue.

356 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

5 In a similar manner, change the color of the Worm Gear Assy:2 instance to red.

Format Sketch Blocks | 357

6 Open Sketch1. 7 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Sketch

Properties

.

8 On the Sketch Properties toolbar, click the Formatting Toggle to switch between the default format associated with the block definition and the user format you applied. The default format displays when the toggle is selected. 9 Delete the Worm Gear Assy:2 instance. 10 Reset the geometric properties Line Color for the Worm Gear Assy block definition and Worm Gear Assy:1 instance to Default.

You can also update your block properties to change the Insert Point location, visibility, block name, and description. As with other block edits, any changes are made to the block definition and reflected in all block instances. 11 Double-click the Connecting Rod:1 instance. 12 Click in the graphics window to ensure that no geometry is selected. 13 With no geometry selected, right-click in open space in the graphics window, and select Block Properties. 14 Click Select, and redefine the Insert Point. The Insert Point simply defines the attachment point between the cursor and block instance, when the instance is placed into the sketch.

358 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

15 Change the name to Rod. 16 Click OK. The block definition name changes to Rod and the instance name changes to Rod:1. 17 Use the Block Properties to change the name back to Connecting Rod. 18 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Sketch1 browser node to finish editing the block and return to the sketch. 19 Exit the sketch and save your file. Previous (page 352) | Next (page 359)

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks When you select block instances for inclusion in a new sketch block, you create a nested block. You use sketch constraints, within the nested blocks, and the Flexible attribute to simulate kinematic subassemblies. 1 Open Sketch1 for edit. 2 Select the Worm Gear Assy:1 and Connecting Rod:1 block instances.

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks | 359

3 Click Create Block. 4 Enter Screw Rod Assy as the block name. 5 Click OK. A new block definition Screw Rod Assy is created. Expand the block definition to view the nested structure. 6 Expand the Screw Rod Assy:1 block instance in Sketch1. The Worm Gear Assy:2 and Connecting Rod:2 instances are dependents of the Screw Rod Assy block. NOTE When the Screw Rod Assy nested block is defined, the original instances Worm Gear Assy:1 and Connecting Rod:1 are deleted. New instances Worm Gear Assy:2 and Connecting Rod:2 are created as dependents in the nested block. 7 Drag and drop the Screw Rod Assy block definition (from the Blocks folder) into the graphics window. The Screw Rod Assy:2 instance is created.

360 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

8 Double-click either Screw Rod Assy instance in the Model browser. The block definition is open for in-context edit. All other geometry is shaded to gray.

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks | 361

9 Double-click the Worm Gear Assy:2 block instance, either in the Model browser or in the graphics window. 10 Create a centerline down the axis of the Worm Gear Assy, as shown. Ensure that the centerline endpoints are constrained to the Worm Gear Assy geometry. This centerline will participate in a collinear constraint with the centerline of the Connecting Rod.

NOTE Both instances of the Worm Gear Assy update to show the centerline.

362 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

11 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. You are returned to the edit of the Screw Rod Assy block. NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Screw Rod Assy block instance node to finish the edit of the Worm Gear Assy block. This returns you to the edit of the Screw Rod Assy block. 12 Apply the collinear constraint between the Worm Gear Assy and Connecting Rod centerlines.

13 Right-click, and select Show All Constraints. The collinear constraint glyphs are shown for both Screw Rod Assy instances.

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks | 363

14 Right-click, and select Hide All Constraints. 15 Click the Connecting Rod geometry in the graphics window and drag. The sketch block instances begin to demonstrate basic kinematics due to the collinear constraint.

364 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

16 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Sketch1 browser node to finish editing the block and return to the sketch. Use sketch constraints between nested blocks to represent your assembly. 17 Select Screw Rod Assy:2, and use Rotate on the Sketch tab to rotate as shown.

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks | 365

18 Apply the Coincident constraint shown.

to the block instances as

19 Click the corner geometry of either block instance in the graphics window and drag.

366 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

Since the block instances are constrained at the sketch level, you can move the block instances relative to one another. However, the geometry within the block instances shows no relative motion. To manipulate the block instance degrees of freedom outside of the block instances, you toggle the block instance to Flexible. 20 Right-click each Screw Rod Assy instance, and check Flexible. 21 Click different sections of the block instance geometry, and drag to see the effect. 22 Experiment with different constraints, both within the block instances and at the sketch level, and note how you can simulate different kinematics. You begin to see the power behind nested and flexible sketch blocks. 23 Exit the sketch and drag the geometry. With the block instances toggled to Flexible, the degrees of freedom remain exposed at the part level. 24 Save your part file and exit. The tutorial is complete. Previous (page 355) | Next (page 367)

Summary In this tutorial, you: ■ Created sketch blocks. ■

Edited sketch blocks.

■

Created nested, flexible sketch blocks, and simulated 2D kinematics.

For further use of sketch blocks, visit the Top-down Workflow tutorial. This tutorial demonstrates the use of sketch blocks in the top-down design workflow. Remember to check Help for further details on sketch blocks.

Summary | 367

Previous (page 359)

368 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

14

Parameters

About this tutorial

Create table-driven models. Category

Experienced Users

Time Required

30 minutes

Tutorial File Used

Start a new Excel spreadsheet nozzle.ipt

369

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. Create an external table of parameters. Then link it to an existing part file to make the part a parametric table-driven model. Objectives ■ Create a table. ■

Link a table to an existing part.

■

Assign parameters to existing dimensions.

■

Resize the part by changing one value.

Prerequisites ■ Know how to set the and navigate the model space with the various view commands. ■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 370)

Work with Tables The table you create in this tutorial is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet containing 11 parameters that control the size and shape of the part. Ten of the parameters are equations. The radius of the nozzle base is an absolute value. Changing the radius of the nozzle base updates all other parameters.

370 | Chapter 14 Parameters

NOTE You must have Microsoft Excel installed on your computer to complete this tutorial. Previous (page 369) | Next (page 371)

Create the External Table 1 Open Microsoft Excel. 2 Enter these values and equations in the first two columns: NOTE To enter an equation in a cell, start the entry with the = character. A

B

1

base

10

2

ht

=B1*2.7

3

lip

=B1*0.6

4

face

=B1*2.4

Create the External Table | 371

5

tdepth

=B1

6

tarc

=B1*0.6

7

tfix

=B1*0.6

Previous (page 370) | Next (page 372)

Finish the Table 1 Add the following values to control your part features: A

B

8

chamfer

=B1*0.2

9

extrude1

=B1*1.2

10

extrude2

=B1*0.6

372 | Chapter 14 Parameters

11

holedia

=B1*0.6

Previous (page 371) | Next (page 373)

Review Parameter Assignment Process Before you link this spreadsheet to an existing part, review the steps you take to control the part using parameters: 1 Open an existing part file. 2 Link an external table. 3 Assign parameters to existing dimensions. 4 Modify the value of one parameter. 5 Update the part.

Review Parameter Assignment Process | 373

Previous (page 372) | Next (page 374)

Open a Part 1 Switch to the Autodesk Inventor window. (If you have not started a session yet, do so now.)

2 Click

➤ Open.

3 Open nozzle.ipt.

374 | Chapter 14 Parameters

Previous (page 373) | Next (page 375)

Work with Parameters Nozzle.ipt is just like any other part in that it is defined by parameters. Parameters are values assigned to elements you create. As you sketch and build features, Autodesk Inventor automatically assigns parameters to the values controlling the elements. 1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel

➤ Parameters

to open the Parameters dialog box.

2 Review the list of model parameters already assigned to the part.

Work with Parameters | 375

■

Whenever you dimension an element or define a feature, Autodesk Inventor assigns a parameter name to that value.

■

Each parameter in your model is prefixed by the letter d. You can edit any parameter, however, d is reserved for parameter names. To avoid conflicts, do not use this prefix when defining parameters in an external table.

376 | Chapter 14 Parameters

■

To edit a parameter name or equation, click in the cell you want to change.

■

Use the same method to add comments.

Previous (page 374) | Next (page 377)

Link Your External Table 1 Click Link in the Parameters dialog box. 2 Select the nozzle.xls file you created. 3 Click Open. The program imports the external table into the Parameters dialog box.

Link Your External Table | 377

4 Review your parameter names and values. 5 Click Done when you are ready. Previous (page 375) | Next (page 379)

378 | Chapter 14 Parameters

Prepare to Assign Parameters Now you are ready to assign the parameters to your part. First, let’s review the steps: 1 Assign parameters to the dimensions controlling the sketch. 2 Assign parameters to the values controlling the part features. NOTE The numbers in the following image correspond to the rows in your spreadsheet.

Previous (page 377) | Next (page 379)

Modify Your Sketch Dimensions First, modify the sketch dimensions: 1 Double-click Sketch1 in the browser to switch to Sketch mode.

Prepare to Assign Parameters | 379

2 Right-click in the graphics window, and then select Dimension Display ➤ Expression. 3 Double-click the 10-mm horizontal dimension at the base of the sketch.

4 Enter base in the Edit Dimension dialog box. 5 Replace the other dimensions with spreadsheet driven parameters as shown. NOTE Parameter names are case sensitive. Invalid parameter names are displayed in red text.

380 | Chapter 14 Parameters

6 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch.

Previous (page 379) | Next (page 381)

Modify the Two Extrusions Modify the values controlling the two extrusions. 1 In the browser, right-click Extrusion1, and then select Edit Feature.

Modify the Two Extrusions | 381

2 In the Extrude dialog box, change 12 mm to extrude1. 3 Click OK to accept your changes. 4 Repeat these steps for Extrusion2, replacing 6 mm with extrude2.

382 | Chapter 14 Parameters

Previous (page 379) | Next (page 383)

Modify the Chamfer Feature Next, modify the value controlling the chamfer feature. 1 Right-click Chamfer1, and then select Edit Feature.

Modify the Chamfer Feature | 383

2 In the Chamfer dialog box, change 2 mm to chamfer. 3 Click OK to accept your changes. NOTE The size of the part has not changed yet because the parameters in your spreadsheet have the same values as the original parameters. Previous (page 381) | Next (page 384)

Modify the Hole Feature Finally, modify the value controlling the hole feature. 1 Right-click Hole1, and then select Edit Feature.

384 | Chapter 14 Parameters

2 In the Diameter field of the Holes dialog box, change 6 mm to holedia. 3 Click OK to accept your changes. 4 Click Save. Previous (page 383) | Next (page 385)

Control Your Part with Parameters Now that all the values that define the shape and size of the part have assigned parameters, you are ready to control the size of your part from the external table. 1 Return to the Microsoft Excel window. 2 Change the value of base to 20. 3 Save nozzle.xls. 4 Return to the Autodesk Inventor window.

Control Your Part with Parameters | 385

Previous (page 384) | Next (page 386)

Update Your Part To view the new part version, update the part file. 1 Click Update. Autodesk Inventor recalculates the part using the values in the external table.

2 Save the part. Previous (page 385) | Next (page 386)

Summary Using a simple symmetrical part, you learned how to: ■ Create an external table. ■

Edit existing dimensions.

■

Modify an external table.

■

Control part versions.

386 | Chapter 14 Parameters

Using these techniques, you can create your own parametric, table-driven models.

Previous (page 386)

Summary | 387

388

iLogic - Part Modeling

15

About this tutorial

Add rules to models. Category

Experienced Users

Time Required

30 minutes

389

Tutorial File Used

Manifold_Block_no_rules.ipt

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. This tutorial expands upon the information presented in the iLogic Basics tutorial. iLogic helps you write rules that can drive the parameters, features, attributes, iProperties, and other elements in an Autodesk Inventor model. The rules are stored within the part or assembly document. iLogic rules are written in a language that is a slightly modified version of Visual Basic .Net (VB.Net). The language is easy to learn, including the more advanced features that are also available. In the following lessons, you add rules to a parametric part. Objectives ■ Use the parameter interface ■

Add a rule

■

Write a rule

■

Run a rule

■

Edit a rule

■

Use the Rule Browser to reorder rules

■

Read data from an embedded spreadsheet

■

Set feature and component activity

Prerequisites ■ Familiarity with Autodesk Inventor, and its basic part modeling functionality and concepts. ■

Completion of the iLogic Basics tutorial.

■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 391)

390 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

Introduction to the Sample Model The model that you work with throughout this tutorial is a simple manifold block. The block contains a set of three available ports referenced as A, B, and C. Each port is on a different side of the block. A port consists of a center hole (of variable size), and a set of surrounding threaded bolt holes. The holes are used to mount union caps in a later tutorial. This manifold block can be either a tee style block, which has all three ports, or an elbow style block with only two ports. Also, the block can be either a standard block or a custom block. On a standard block, which can be ordered off the shelf, all ports are the same size. A custom block, which must be manufactured, can feature a different size for each port. Finally, the part contains an embedded Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, which is used to specify the values for various parameters as the port sizes are changed. You begin by adding additional parameters to the model to support the rules you write later. Previous (page 389) | Next (page 391)

Open a Part Document 1 Set your active project to iLogic 2011 Tutorials. This setting provides easier access to the necessary files, and supports the work in the next tutorial. 2 Open manifold_block_no_rules.ipt. You add model rules to this part throughout the tutorial. 3 Save this file as manifold_block.ipt. You now have the manifold_block.ipt file open.

Introduction to the Sample Model | 391

Previous (page 391) | Next (page 392)

Create Port Size Parameters First, we need a set of parameters to control the size of three ports on our manifold block. Most of the parameters have been named in the parameter editor already. It is good practice to name your parameters for future reference when creating a parametric design. Parameters with meaningful names make the rules that drive or reference them easier to read and understand.

1

On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤ Parameters. NOTE Parameter names in iLogic are case sensitive. Follow the case being used in the Parameters dialog box, and also when creating rules.

392 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

2 Create a new numeric parameter named port_a_size. Set the Unit value to in, and enter an initial Equation value of 0.50. Define it as a multi-value parameter with the following values: 0.5 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00

NOTE For more details on the exact steps needed to create a parameter, please revisit the iLogic Basics tutorial. Remember that you can cut and paste the values from the previous table to set the values for the multi-value list. 3 Make port_a_size a Key parameter. 4 Create two more parameters, named port_b_size and port_c_size, with the same settings and multi-value list. Set both as Key parameters. Previous (page 391) | Next (page 393)

Create Block and Component Type Parameters Now, we must create two more parameters that control the type of block being modeled. One parameter determines whether the block is a tee or elbow design.

Create Block and Component Type Parameters | 393

The other parameter defines whether we are creating a standard or a custom block. 1 Create a text parameter named block, and define it as a multi-value parameter with the following values: tee elbow

2 In the Equation field of this new parameter, set the current value to tee, and define it as a Key parameter. 3 Create a second text parameter named component_type, and define it a multi-value parameter with the following values: standard custom

4 Set the current value to standard, and define it as a Key parameter. 5 Click Done to exit the Parameters dialog box. 6 Save your document, but do not close it. Previous (page 392) | Next (page 394)

Define a Model Rule to Control Port Visibility In the iLogic Basics tutorial, you learned that you can use parameter names from a model as variables in a rule. Also, you can select from lists of available parameters, as well as features and other model entities, for inclusion in a rule. Now, we define a set of rules that drive the geometry of our model based on the values of the key parameters we defined previously. In this lesson, we construct each rule in segments. The entire text of all the rules can be found at the end of this tutorial.

394 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

The first rule makes model changes to the Port B features, based on whether the elbow or tee block is selected. To make this change, suppress or enable the Port B features based on the type of block.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ iLogic panel ➤ Add

1 Rule.

2 Name the rule block_shape_rule, and click OK to display the Edit Rule dialog box. 3 In the text area, create the first part of your new rule, which defines what happens if the block is a tee-style block.

Copy Code Block If block = “tee” Then 4 Because all three ports are active in the tee-style block, add the steps to ensure that Port B is enabled. Activate two features in the part.

Copy Code Block Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = True Feature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = True NOTE The Feature.IsActive function is available for selection in the Snippets area of the Edit Rule dialog box. Click the System tab, then expand the Features node. We have now defined the behavior of our model for a tee block. 5 To define the model behavior for an elbow block, begin with an ElseIf statement.

Define a Model Rule to Control Port Visibility | 395

Copy Code Block ElseIf block = "elbow" Then 6 To suppress the Port B features when creating an elbow block, use the features we created for the tee block, but with opposite values.

Copy Code Block Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = False Feature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = False A simple way to add these lines is to copy and paste the text for the tee block behavior. Then change True to False in the new lines. 7 Complete the If block of your rule with an End If statement. That’s it! All the instructions necessary to enable or disable the Port B features based on the type of block being used are included. 8 Click OK to save the completed rule. Previous (page 393) | Next (page 396)

Test the Block Shape Rule To verify that this rule is really in control of our model: 1 Observe the current state of the model.

396 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

2 Open Parameters dialog box. 3 In the block row, change tee to elbow using the multi-value drop-down menu in the Equation cell. Port B has been suppressed. 4 Change the block parameter back to tee, and close the Parameters dialog box.

Test the Block Shape Rule | 397

Previous (page 394) | Next (page 398)

Manage Part Configurations We now cover the last two topics listed in the beginning of this tutorial: ■ Read data from an embedded spreadsheet. ■

Set feature and component activity.

iLogic provides built-in functions that read information from Excel spreadsheets. These functions are available in the Snippets area, on the System tab, by expanding the Excel Data Links node. In this lesson, we write a rule that uses values from an embedded Excel spreadsheet to set the values for parameters that control the port geometry, based on a specified size. Our rule looks up the port size in the spreadsheet to identify the row of values. Then it reads fields from that row to get the appropriate parameter values. A tee-style block includes three ports. Each port is listed in the Parameters dialog box. However, changing the port size in the Parameters dialog box does

398 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

not change the port size in our model. We must add rules to drive the different port sizes. Our first step is to add a rule that sets the size of the ports and the dimensions of the screw pattern around each port. The screw pattern is used in the assembly to hold a flange onto the block. 1 In the Autodesk Inventor model browser, expand the 3rd Party node in the tree. 2 Right-click on Embedding 1, and select Edit to access the embedded spreadsheet. 3 Add a rule named port_size_rule, and click OK to open the Edit Rule dialog box. The first thing our rule must do is locate the row in the spreadsheet that contains the values to use for Port A. We look up the value matching the port_a_size parameter in a column labeled port_size. 4 In the Snippets area of the dialog box, on the System tab, locate the function labeled FindRow (embedded) in the Excel Data Links node. Double-click the function to insert it into the text area.

Copy Code Block i = GoExcel.FindRow(“3rd Party:Embedding 1”, “Sheet1”, “columnName”, “d, L0, n, D from the Design Type drop-down menu. 2 Select No Correction from the Method of Stress Curvature Correction drop-down menu. 3 In the Loads region: ■ Set Min. Load to 500 N. ■

Set Max. Load to 800 N.

■

Set Working Load to 600 N.

4 Click Calculate to perform the calculation.

914 | Chapter 37 Compression Springs

The program shows results on the right side of the Calculation tab. The inputs that fail the calculation appear in red (their value does not correspond with other inserted values or calculation criteria). Reports of the calculation are displayed in the Summary of Messages area, which appears after you click the chevron in the lower-right part of the Calculation tab. 5 Click the Results command in the right upper corner to open the HTML report. 6 Click OK. Previous (page 912) | Next (page 915)

Insert the Compression Spring into the Assembly In the File Naming dialog box: 1 Specify the Display name of compression spring and the File name settings. 2 Select the Always prompt for filename box to prompt for the newly inserted Design Accelerator component's file name and display name every time you create a component. 3 Click OK to insert the compression spring to the assembly. When you were designing the compression spring, the program prompted you to select the compression spring placement. The program places the compression spring in the selected position. 4 Save the assembly.

Insert the Compression Spring into the Assembly | 915

Previous (page 914) | Next (page 917)

916 | Chapter 37 Compression Springs

Summary

The skills you learned in this tutorial include: ■ Design a compression spring. ■

Position the compression spring within the assembly.

■

Use the graphical preview.

■

Set compression spring properties.

■

Set file names and display names.

■

Insert a compression spring into the assembly.

Remember to check Help for further information. Previous (page 915)

Summary | 917

918

38

Weldments

About this tutorial

Build weldments. Category

Mechanical Design

Time Required

50 minutes

Tutorial File Used

Welding.iam (metric)

919

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. In this tutorial, you build a weldment from an assembly. The weldment file is a variation on the assembly template and opens with the Weld tab active. You can also use any of the other assembly tabs and commands. You use the welding feature groups (Preparations, Welds, or Machining) to add assembly-level features and fully define your weldment. Objectives ■ Add weld preparation features. ■

Create cosmetic and 3D weld beads.

■

Add machining features to a welded assembly.

■

Rollback to any weldment state.

■

Create weldment drawings.

Prerequisites ■ Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding. ■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 920)

Welding Steps Overview When creating a weld in this tutorial, your steps include the following: 1 Set up your workspace. 2 Open an existing assembly. 3 Change to the weldment environment.

920 | Chapter 38 Weldments

4 Add groove and fillet cosmetic welds. 5 Add post-weld machining features. 6 Examine weld preparations and 3D fillet welds.

After the weldment is complete, you will: ■ Turn off the display of weld symbols in the model. ■

Open a blank drawing.

■

Create drawing views of the various weldment stages.

■

Retrieve weld symbols from the model.

■

Add a cosmetic weld annotation in the drawing.

Welding Steps Overview | 921

Previous (page 919) | Next (page 922)

Weldment Feature Groups The three weld groups represent stages in the weldment process: ■ Preparations - Metal removal, typically a chamfer, to prepare for a weld. ■

Welds - Fillet, groove, and cosmetic weld beads.

■

Machining - Metal removal after welding, often through multiple assembly components.

Features added in the three groups act at the assembly-level only. They do not appear in the individual parts and subassemblies. The following image shows weld and machining features in a weldment assembly.

922 | Chapter 38 Weldments

The weldment features exist in the weldment assembly only and do not affect the part files. You activate the various weldment feature groups with the Weld tab or through the Model browser. To do this, you must first open a Weldment file. 1 Set the active project to tutorial_files. 2 Click New on the Quick Access toolbar. Ensure that you click the icon itself, and not the associated drop-down menu. 3 To ensure that you complete this tutorial using a metric template file, click the Metric tab displayed along the top of the selection area of the dialog box. 4 Double-click the template file Weldment (ANSI - mm).iam.

5 To activate the Preparation feature group, click Preparation on the Weld tab. Commands for creating weld preparations, such as chamfers and assembly-level cut extrusions, become active on the Weld tab. You can also activate one of the three weld groups through the Model browser. For example, if you double-click Welds in the browser, the commands for creating welds, such as Fillet, Groove, and Cosmetic, become active. Alternatively, you can right-click a group in the browser and select Edit from the context menu. 6 Close this file without saving. Previous (page 920) | Next (page 924)

Weldment Feature Groups | 923

Open an Assembly Two different workflows can be used to create a weldment. You can: ■ Use a weldment template to create an empty weldment into which you then place components and welds. ■

Open an existing assembly and convert it into a weldment.

In this exercise, you open an existing assembly and convert it into a weldment. 1 Click Open on the Quick Access toolbar, and then open Weldments ➤ Welding.iam.

2 Click Zoom All on the Navigation bar to fit the model in the window.

3 On the ribbon, click Environments tab ➤ Convert panel ➤ Convert to Weldment. A message appears alerting you that the weldment cannot be converted back to an assembly. 4 Click Yes. The Convert to Weldment dialog box displays. 5 Click the ANSI Standard option. 6 Select Welded Steel Mild from the Weld Bead Material drop-down list. 7 Click OK.

924 | Chapter 38 Weldments

The weld feature groups (Preparations, Welds, and Machining) appear in the Model browser. Previous (page 922) | Next (page 925)

Weld Types You can create three types of weld features: fillet, groove, and cosmetic welds. Cosmetic weld features, the preferred type, are represented by graphical elements. You can represent a wide variety of weld beads as cosmetic welds, including fillet welds and various groove welds. Weld preparations are not required for cosmetic welds. The weld symbol contains the weld preparation required for the selected edges.

Cosmetic weld features do not affect mass properties, and the application does not consider them during interference analysis. You can also create 3D fillet welds. ■ The weld is a true 3D feature in the assembly. ■

The program evaluates 3D fillet welds in assembly mass properties and interference analysis.

Weld Types | 925

TIP Limit the use of 3D fillet welds to specific cases that require functionality not available in cosmetic welds. Previous (page 924) | Next (page 926)

Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead In this portion of the tutorial, you add two cosmetic weld beads to the assembly. To add a weld bead, you must first activate the Welds group. 1 In the Model browser, right-click Welds, and then select Edit from the pop-up context menu.

2 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Weld panel ➤ Cosmetic . 3 Select the five edges on the Brace part. Edge selections define the extents of the weld bead.

926 | Chapter 38 Weldments

NOTE You may need to use the Select Other command to select the two vertical edges. Previous (page 925) | Next (page 927)

Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued) 1 Click the Create Welding Symbol check box to expand the dialog box, then click Weld Symbol as shown.

2 On the Weld Symbol palette, click Bevel Groove Weld.

Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued) | 927

Previous (page 926) | Next (page 928)

Complete the Cosmetic Weld 1 Define the weld properties: NOTE Pause the cursor over a data entry field, and use the tooltips to identify the field name. Make certain that the Autodesk Inventor application window is active (and not this tutorial window), or tooltips will not appear under the cursor. ■

Enter 6 mm in the Depth field (use the following illustration for reference).

■

Enter 6 mm in the Leg 2 field.

■

Select the Flat symbol from the Contour drop-down menu.

■

Select G (grind) from the Method drop-down menu (this menu is only visible after you specify a contour).

928 | Chapter 38 Weldments

2 Click OK. NOTE Pause the cursor over a data entry field, and use the tooltips to identify the field name. Make certain that the Autodesk Inventor application window is active (and not this tutorial window), or tooltips will not appear under the cursor. The program represents a cosmetic weld with a bright orange line. The weld symbol is attached to the cosmetic weld.

NOTE Your weld symbol may not appear exactly as shown in the previous illustration.

3 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Return panel ➤ Return. 4 Save the file. Previous (page 927) | Next (page 930)

Complete the Cosmetic Weld | 929

Weld Extents You can control the length of single edge welds by specifying two parallel faces or work planes. 1 In the Model browser, right-click the START WELD work plane, and select Visibility. 2 Repeat for the END WELD work plane. 3 In the Model browser, right-click Welds, and then select Edit.

4 Click Weld tab ➤ Weld panel ➤ Cosmetic. 5 Click the edge highlighted as shown.

TIP If you select the wrong edge, press the Ctrl key and deselect the edge. Previous (page 928) | Next (page 930)

Complete the Weld Extent 1 In the Cosmetic Weld dialog box, select From-To from the Extents drop-down list. 2 Select the two visible work planes.

930 | Chapter 38 Weldments

TIP Click on the outer edge of a work plane to select it. 3 To specify the weld bead size, begin by clicking the Create Welding Symbol check box to expand the dialog box. 4 Enter 6 mm in the Leg 1 text box. 5 Click OK.

6 Click Return. 7 Turn off the visibility of the two work planes.

NOTE Your weld symbol may not be visible following creation, or it may not appear like the previous illustration. If it is not visible, orbit the model until you can see the symbol. You can click the symbol, and then drag the green grips to resize the symbol leader or move the symbol along the weld. Previous (page 930) | Next (page 931)

Create a 3D Fillet Weld Next, we add a simple 3D fillet weld to one of the cylindrical reinforcement plates. 1 In the Model browser, double-click the Welds node.

2 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Weld panel ➤ Fillet.

Create a 3D Fillet Weld | 931

For a 3D weld, you select sets of faces on two different components. The program creates the weld at the common edges of the faces. 3 Click the channel face adjacent to one of the cylindrical plates.

Previous (page 930) | Next (page 932)

Complete the 3D Fillet Weld To complete the weld, select the other face to locate the weld.

1 In the dialog box, click the Select Face(s) 2 button. 2 Click the cylindrical face on the adjacent plate.

932 | Chapter 38 Weldments

3 Enter 6 mm in both fields under the selector buttons. 4 Select the Create Welding Symbol check box. 5 Enter 6 mm in the Leg 1 field. 6 Click OK to create a 45 degree fillet with a leg length of 6 mm.

Complete the 3D Fillet Weld | 933

Previous (page 931) | Next (page 934)

Change Weld Symbol Visibility In larger weldments, the graphics screen can become cluttered with weld symbols. You can control the visibility of weld symbols, or weld features, individually or as a group.

1 Right-click Welds in the Model browser, and then remove the checkmark from Symbol Visibility. The program hides the weld symbols in the graphics window. Alternatively, expand the Welds node and switch the visibility of individual weld symbols.

2 Click Return

to go back to the weldment assembly environment.

Previous (page 932) | Next (page 934)

Add a Machining Feature Weldments often require machining after welding. The final weld feature group, Machining, provides a way to add assembly-level features that remove material from the welded assembly. To add a machining feature, on the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Process panel ➤ Machining.

934 | Chapter 38 Weldments

Previous (page 934) | Next (page 935)

Add a Hole 1 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Preparation and Machining

panel ➤ Hole. 2 In the Holes dialog box, select Concentric from the Placement drop-down menu. 3 Select the top face of one of the cylindrical reinforcement plates. 4 For the circular reference, select the circular edge of the cylindrical plate. 5 Highlight the 3-mm dimension in the Diameter field, and then enter 33 mm as the hole diameter. 6 Select Through All from the Termination drop-down menu. 7 Click OK. The hole feature cuts through the two hole plates and the channel.

NOTE You can add extrude cuts, chamfers, and hole features in both the Preparations and Machining weld groups. Previous (page 934) | Next (page 936)

Add a Hole | 935

Add an Extrude Cut Add a second machining feature that cuts through one of the welds. 1 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ 2D Sketch.

2 Click the top face of the brace highlighted in the following figure.

3 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Project

Geometry. 4 Click the edge highlighted as shown.

Previous (page 935) | Next (page 937)

936 | Chapter 38 Weldments

Complete the Sketch 1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Center Point

Circle. 2 Move the cursor over the midpoint of the projected line, and then click when the green midpoint symbol appears. 3 Move the cursor away from the center point, and then click again to define the radius of the circle. The exact size of the circle radius is not important. Use the circle in the following figure as a guide.

4 Right-click, and select Done [ESC] from the marking menu.

5 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. Previous (page 936) | Next (page 937)

Extrude the Sketch 1 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Preparation and Machining

panel ➤ Extrude. The program selects the circle profile. 2 Select All from the Extents drop-down list in the Extrude dialog box.

Complete the Sketch | 937

3 Ensure that Direction is selected as shown.

The program previews the cut, which should look like the image below.

4 Click OK. The cut affects the two components and the weld bead.

Previous (page 937) | Next (page 939)

938 | Chapter 38 Weldments

Feature Rollback The three weldment groups represent time-dependent processes in the creation of a welded assembly. Features from a subsequent process cannot appear when an earlier group is active. For example, machining features do not appear when the Welds group is active. 1 Right-click Welds in the Model browser, and then select Edit from the pop-up context menu. The program rolls back the model to the welding state and removes the two machining features.

2 Click Return. In the weldment assembly environment, all weld group features are visible.

Previous (page 937) | Next (page 940)

Feature Rollback | 939

Create a Weldment Drawing You can create drawing views of the weldment in the following states: ■ Assembled with no assembly-level features. ■

Complete with weld preparations.

■

As welded.

■

With all post-weld machining.

To create a weldment drawing: 1 OpenWelding.idw. The drawing contains a blank A0 sheet with a border. 2 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Base.

The Drawing View dialog box displays. If Welding.iam is the only model open, it is automatically selected as the source for the drawing. (If nothing is selected it is likely that you have not clicked Return as instructed on the previous panel). 3 If you have multiple models open, click the down arrow next to the File list, and then select Welding.iam from the list. 4 On the Model State tab, select Welds from the Weldment list. 5 On the Component tab, select All Components from the Representation View menu. 6 Select 1/2 from the Scale list. 7 Click Top in the Orientation list. Previous (page 939) | Next (page 940)

Place Drawing Views To complete the base view: 1 Click the upper-left corner of the sheet as shown.

940 | Chapter 38 Weldments

2 On the ribbon, the Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Projected

command is automatically activated. 3 In the graphics window, move the cursor below the base view and click when a preview of an orthographic projection is shown.

Previous (page 940) | Next (page 941)

Complete Orthographic Views You can continue to place projected views from the base view. 1 Move the cursor to the right of the base view. 2 Click when a preview of an orthographic projection is shown.

Complete Orthographic Views | 941

3 Right-click, and select Create.

Previous (page 940) | Next (page 942)

As-machined Drawing Views Now create drawing views of the as-machined weldment. 1 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Base

to display the Drawing View dialog box. 2 If you have multiple models open, click the down arrow next to the File list, and then select Welding.iam from the list.

942 | Chapter 38 Weldments

3 Select All Components from the View pane on the Component tab. 4 Ensure Machining is selected from the Weldment list on the Model State tab. 5 Select 1/2 from the Scale list. 6 Click Top in the Orientation list. 7 To complete the base view, click to the right of the existing views.

Previous (page 941) | Next (page 943)

Projected Drawing Views Add two projected drawing views from the base view of the machined state. 1 On the ribbon, the Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Projected

command is automatically activated. 2 Add two projected views to match the image shown.

Projected Drawing Views | 943

The machining features appear in the drawing views based on the welded state of the assembly. Previous (page 942) | Next (page 944)

Retrieve Weld Symbols You can retrieve weld symbols from the model in the drawing views. 1 Right-click the side view of the as-welded assembly. 2 Select Get Model Annotations ➤ Get Welding Symbols from the overflow menu. NOTE The overflow menu appears just below or just above the marking menu. Its location depends on where you right-click in the graphics window. Symbols for visible welds in the view are retrieved from the model and displayed. If a weld displays in pink, right-click the symbol, and then select Delete from the overflow menu.

944 | Chapter 38 Weldments

3 To reposition and reorient the symbol, you can click a weld symbol and then drag the green grips. Previous (page 943) | Next (page 945)

Add a Caterpillar You can add cosmetic weld entities to drawing views in place of, or to improve the documentation of, cosmetic model welds. You can add weld caterpillars and weld end treatment geometry to any drawing view. 1 On the ribbon, click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Zoom

Window. 2 Zoom in on the front view of the as-welded assembly, as shown in the following figure.

Add a Caterpillar | 945

Previous (page 944) | Next (page 946)

Add a Caterpillar (continued) 1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Symbols panel ➤

Caterpillar. 2 Click the five line/arc segments highlighted as shown.

946 | Chapter 38 Weldments

3 Click the Partial command. A partial caterpillar displays on one side of the highlighted edge. 4 Move the cursor away from the view to position the caterpillar toward the outside of the weldment, and click to place the caterpillar. Click the following image to play an animation. Notice how the caterpillar switches sides as the cursor moves. 5 Click the Options tab. 6 Enter 6 mm in the Width edit box. 7 Enter 2 mm in the Spacing edit box. 8 Check Seam Visibility. 9 Click OK.

10 Save your work. Previous (page 945) | Next (page 948)

Add a Caterpillar (continued) | 947

Summary In this tutorial, you learned how to: ■ Create a weldment from an assembly. ■

Add weld preparation features.

■

Create cosmetic and 3D weld beads.

■

Add machining features to a welded assembly.

■

Rollback to any weldment state.

■

Create weldment drawings.

Previous (page 946)

948 | Chapter 38 Weldments

Sheet Metal Parts

39

949

About this tutorial

950 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Build sheet metal parts. Category

Mechanical Design

Time Required

60 minutes

Tutorial File Used

Cylinder Clamp.iam metric_hole.ide 2mm_inplace_guard_start.idw

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. Parts fabricated from sheet metal are commonly required in designs. Autodesk Inventor provides functionality that simplifies the design, editing, and documentation of both the finished folded model and flat patterns associated with sheet metal parts. Objectives ■ Create a simple sheet metal guard working within the context of the Cylinder Clamp assembly that was used in the Assemblies tutorial. ■

Add sheet metal-specific annotations to a drawing of the guard.

Prerequisites ■ Complete the Parts 2 and Assemblies tutorials. ■

Understand the basics of sheet metal fabrication.

■

Understand the material covered in the Help topic “Getting Started.”

■

Ensure that Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is not checked.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 952)

About this tutorial | 951

Get Started In the first portion of this tutorial, you will create a simple sheet metal guard. You create the guard in the assembly using projected geometry and measurements of assembly components. This workflow ensures that the guard will be sized correctly. There are other ways to start a design. Before you begin the steps of the tutorial, let’s review a typical workflow that produces a similar model:

1 A common first step is the creation of a closed profile sketch. 2 Using this closed profile sketch, a sheet metal Face feature is created as the base feature of the model.

952 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

3 Once a base Face feature exists, Flange features can be added. 4 Additional Flange features with automatic mitering can be added to existing Flange features. 5 Finally, a series of Hole features can complete the model. Using a Face feature as the base feature is very common in a stand-alone design workflow. However, the sheet metal part that you are creating will often need to fit inside or over existing parts in an assembly. In the next portion of the tutorial, you open an existing assembly and create a part like the one illustrated. You will use geometry selected in the assembly to determine the size and position of the features that you will create.

Get Started | 953

Previous (page 950) | Next (page 954)

Open the Assembly 1 Set your project to tutorial_files. 2 OpenCylinder Clamp ➤ Cylinder Clamp.iam. 3 Using the View Cube, Orbit, or View Face, adjust your view of the assembly so that it appears as follows:

The guard that you are going to create must fit over the base. By creating the sketch for a Contour Flange feature on the face of Cylinder Base.ipt, you can use the geometry of that part while defining your sketch profile geometry. 4 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Create, or right-click and select Create Component from the marking menu. 5 Enter my_2mm_guard in the New Component Name field in the Create In-Place Component dialog box.

954 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

6 Click the Browse Templates button to the right of the Template field, which contains Standard.ipt as the default selection, and select the Metric tab in the displayed Open Template dialog box. 7 Select the Sheet Metal (mm).ipt template, and click OK to enter the selection in the Create In-Place Component dialog box (replacing the default) and close the Open Template dialog box. 8 Click OK to close the Create In-Place Component dialog box. 9 In the graphics window, click to select the back face of Cylinder Base.ipt as shown:

Following the selection of the face shown, an empty sketch within the newly created sheet metal file displays. Next you create a simple open profile sketch to use to create a Contour Flange as the base feature of your guard. Previous (page 952) | Next (page 956)

Open the Assembly | 955

Prepare Your Sketch NOTE All sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you have recently completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, your sketch grid is undisplayed by changing the Application Options. This tutorial does not require the use of the sketch grid and can be completed with the grid displayed or undisplayed.

While creating a part within an assembly, you are able to see and reference the other parts in the assembly. By default, when you reference geometry in another part, you get an associative relationship to that part. If the original part changes, the geometry that you created also changes to honor the association. In this tutorial, you use an option to reference the geometry without creating the associative reference. In situations where you are certain

956 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

there will be no further design changes, not creating an associative relationship improves subsequent assembly recompute performance. 1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Construction to ensure that the line you project is “construction” geometry that will not be used for feature creation. 2 Next, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Project Geometry, or right-click and select Project Geometry from the marking menu. 3 While holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard, click the lower edge of Cylinder Base.ipt as shown:

NOTE Holding down the Ctrl key while projecting geometry breaks the associative link that would normally be obtained. Next, you create a simple, three-line sketch that represents the inside faces of the Contour Flange. It will create the basic shape of the guard. Previous (page 954) | Next (page 958)

Prepare Your Sketch | 957

Create the Open Profile 1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Construction to reset your geometry creation to normal geometry. 2 Next, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line, or right-click and select Line from the marking menu. 3 In the graphics window, move your cursor over the lower-left corner of Cylinder Base.ipt until you see the green circle. It indicates that you are over the endpoint of the construction line that you previously projected.

4 Click to place the first point of your line. 5 Paying attention to the vertical and horizontal constraint indications, place three line segments: vertical, then horizontal, and then vertical again. Beginning the new segment from the end point of the previous segment ensures that the lines form a single, continuous open profile. Your profile should appear as in the following image:

958 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

NOTE To determine the horizontal endpoint on the right end of segment 2, drag your cursor down to locate the right end point of the construction line that you projected earlier and then move your cursor upwards vertically maintaining that alignment. The lower endpoint of segment 3 should be coincident with the right endpoint of the projected construction line. These three lines represent the inside faces of the Contour Flange that creates the base feature of the sheet metal guard. 6 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension, or right-click and select Create Dimension from the marking menu. Now, place a vertical dimension of 95 mm to define the height of the guard. Both vertical line segments adjust due to the horizontal constraint that was created when segment 2 was placed.

Create the Open Profile | 959

7 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch to exit the sketch environment. Next, you create the Contour Flange using the open profile sketch you just created. Previous (page 956) | Next (page 960)

Create a Contour Flange Before you create the Contour Flange, check the Sheet Metal Defaults.

960 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

NOTE Complete the Sheet Metal Styles tutorial (when you have time) to understand the inter-relationships between the Materials, Sheet Metal Rules, and Sheet Metal Unfolding Rules. By correctly establishing a set of Sheet Metal Rules for your work, and ensuring that these rules are set as the default in your Sheet Metal.ipt template, you will be able to begin sheet metal design projects without editing the Sheet Metal Defaults each time you start a new part design. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Setup panel ➤ Sheet Metal Defaults, or right-click and select Sheet Metal Defaults from the marking menu. 2 Take note of the following items: ■ Name of the Sheet Metal Rule ■

State of the check box for Use Thickness from Rule

■

Value in the Thickness field

If Use Thickness from Rule is checked, and the value in the Thickness field is something other than 2 mm, click the check box to remove the check. 3 The Thickness field is now enabled. Enter 2 mm to replace the value in this field. 4 Click OK to apply the 2-mm thickness to the current model file. NOTE These steps allowed you to override the material thickness declared by the active Sheet Metal Rule. In most cases, you begin your designs using a template that has an appropriate Sheet Metal Rule active. Or, you previously created Sheet Metal Rules for your work that you can select from the drop-down list of Rules available in the shared Styles and Standards library. Now, you can create the Contour Flange. 5 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Contour Flange. 6 In the graphics window, click over the three-line sketch that you previously completed. Note that the 2-mm thickness of the sheet metal Contour Flange is previewed, and that it is offset to the inside. 7 In the Contour Flange dialog box, click the Flip Side option. The 2-mm material thickness should now be offset to the outside of the profile, as shown in the following image:

Create a Contour Flange | 961

8 With the Contour Flange dialog box active, adjust your view (using either the View Cube or Orbit) to see the side of the model as follows:

962 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Next, you change the flange creation direction and measure an existing edge to complete the creation of the Contour Flange. Previous (page 958) | Next (page 963)

Complete the Contour Flange 1 In the Contour Flange dialog box (in the Width Extents area), click Distance Flip. 2 Click > to the right side of the Distance field, and select Measure from

the menu. 3 With the Measure option active, click in the graphics window to measure the length of the edge shown. Use the measured value as the Distance value for the Contour Flange.

Complete the Contour Flange | 963

Following the click, the measured value of 120 mm displays in the Distance field and the Contour Flange previews as 120 mm long. 4 Click OK to create the displayed Contour Flange and close the dialog box.

964 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

The sheet metal Contour Flange is the base feature in the model file that you created working within the assembly context. The sheet metal part displays as solid while the other components within the assembly display as translucent. By working within the assembly context you were able to use existing critical dimensions without initially knowing their values. Next, you add a sheet metal Flange feature with automatic mitering around three edges along the back side of the guard. Previous (page 960) | Next (page 965)

Place a Flange Feature Many sheet metal parts are created by bending a portion of the flat sheet. Use the Flange command to add flat material along an edge, portion of an edge or around all edges of a face. The flat material connects to the selected edge using a bend radius defined within your Sheet Metal Rule. The Flange

Place a Flange Feature | 965

command provides flexibility in the position and size of the flange relative to the selected edge and other features within the evolving model. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Flange, or right-click and select Flange from the marking menu. 2 In the graphics window, click to select the three inside edges shown.

As you select the edges, the Flange feature previews. Note that Flanges created from co-planar edges automatically miter at corners that would otherwise interfere. You can access the Auto-miter option from the Corner tab of the Flange dialog box. NOTE For this Flange, be certain to select the three inside edges. By default, sheet metal Flange features are created using the Bend Position option labeled Inside of bend face extents. This produces a Flange face coincident with the selected edge. In this case, such a Flange would not allow clearance for the corners of Cylinder Base.ipt. Instead, you will change the

966 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Bend Position to Bend from the adjacent face, which uses the selected edge as the beginning location of the bend for the Flange. 3 Click the Bend Position option labeled Bend from the adjacent face.

NOTE As you click this option, notice that the preview of the three Flange faces moves out from the selected edges. To see this change more clearly, display the model as Wireframe (View tab ➤ Appearance panel ➤ Wireframe from under the Visual Style drop-down menu), and view the model from the Top. Switch between Inside of bend face extents and Bend from the adjacent face (be certain to return to Bend from the adjacent face, then reset your display to Shaded and reset your view angle, before continuing). 4 For this Flange feature, use the default value of 90 degrees for the Flange Angle, as well as the default value of 25 mm for the Height Extents Distance. 5 Click OK to create the Flange and close the Flange dialog box.

Place a Flange Feature | 967

Next, you create a sketch containing center marks for punched holes. Previous (page 963) | Next (page 968)

Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ Create 2D Sketch, or right-click and select 2D Sketch from the marking menu. Next, select the face of the guard shown in the following image:

968 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

NOTE If you have not already cleared the Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit application option as specified in the tutorial Prerequisites, this sketch and all subsequent sketches made in this tutorial will have unnecessary projected geometry. 2 If necessary, adjust your view normal to the sketch using the View Cube or the View Face command. Click View tab ➤ Appearance panel ➤ Shaded with Hidden Edges from the drop-down menu under Visual Style. Use this orientation and display to see edges of other components within the assembly. Your view should appear as follows:

Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks | 969

You will again create non-associative construction geometry, as you did when you began your sketch for the Contour Flange base feature. 3 Click Sketch tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Construction. 4 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Project Geometry, or right-click and select Project Geometry from the marking menu. 5 While holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard, click the outside circular edge of Lock Pin:1 as shown:

This projected circle provides the location for a sketched Center Point. It locates a Punch feature (used to provide clearance for the pin), as well as the alignment for two additional Center Points that will be used to

970 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

locate punched mounting holes to attach the guard to Cylinder Base.ipt. Continue by adding two construction line segments. Previous (page 965) | Next (page 971)

Sketch Punch Centers 1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line, or right-click and select Line from the marking menu. 2 In the graphics window, move your cursor into the center of the construction circle previously projected. When the green dot appears, indicating that you have located the center of the projected circle, click to place the first point of a line segment:

3 Paying attention to the vertical and horizontal constraint indicators, place a vertical and a horizontal construction line segment by selecting two additional points. Your profile should appear as follows:

Sketch Punch Centers | 971

4 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension or right-click and select Create Dimension from the marking menu Then, place a horizontal length dimension of 85 mm that defines the distance between the guard mounting holes. 5 Continue by placing a vertical dimension of 8 mm between the bottom edge of the guard and the horizontal construction line:

6 Click Sketch tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Construction to reset your geometry creation to normal geometry. 7 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point.

972 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

8 Place three sketch points at the ends of the two construction line segments. 9 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch to exit the sketch environment. NOTE You can optionally continue to work with a hidden edge display. The remaining illustrations in this tutorial show a shaded display. To return to a shaded display, click View tab ➤ Appearance panel ➤ Shaded from the drop-down menu under Visual Style.

Now that you have sketched Center Points, you will next place two different-sized Punch features to provide clearance for the pin and holes for mounting screws. Previous (page 968) | Next (page 973)

Punch Holes While there are several ways to create circular holes in your sheet metal part, using a round Punch feature provides you with annotation benefits when you detail the flat pattern of your design.

Punch Holes | 973

NOTE This tutorial uses an example Sheet Metal Punch iFeature that contains the two punch sizes required by this tutorial. The IDE file that contains this punch is located in the default project folder that is active when the tutorial_files project is active. To learn more about Sheet Metal Punch iFeatures, please review the Skill Builders posted to: http:\\www.autodesk.com\inventor-skillbuilder These sheet metal Skill Builders can be found by clicking on the Parts heading. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Punch Tool. 2 The Punch Tool Directory dialog box opens. By default, it displays Punch Tools that are stored in the Punches folder, which is located in the Catalog folder under the default installation folder. Click Workspace in the navigation panel on the upper-left side of the Punch Tool Directory dialog box to switch to the Tutorial Files folder. 3 Select Cylinder Clamp ➤ metric_hole.ide, and click Open to display the Punch Tool dialog box. 4 The example file includes punches of two different sizes; however, the 2.5-mm diameter punch is previewed on the three center points in the displayed and unconsumed sketch. While the 2.5-mm diameter punch is needed on two of the center points, you must first clear the center point that will be used for the 12-mm punch. While holding the Shift key, move your cursor over the center point as shown, and click to clear the center point.

5 Click Finish in the Punch Tool dialog box to place the 2.5-mm diameter punch on the remaining two center points and close the dialog box. Next, you follow a similar set of steps to place the 12-mm diameter punch.

974 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Previous (page 971) | Next (page 975)

Punch Holes (continued) 1 Click + to the left of the Folded Model node in the Model browser to view the expanded feature tree.

2 Click + to the left of the iFeature in the Model browser. 3 Right-click the sketch node located under the table node, and click Share Sketch on the context menu. The sketch that was consumed (and hidden) by the placement of the Sheet Metal Punch iFeature is redisplayed. This provides you with a visible sketch to use while placing the 12-mm diameter punch. Notice that a new sketch node is placed in the Model browser above the feature that originally consumed the sketch. 4 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Punch Tool. 5 Click Workspace in the navigation panel on the upper-left side of the Punch Tool Directory dialog box. 6 Select the metric_hole.ide file, and click Open. 7 Click the Punch tab in the Punch Tool dialog box. 8 Click the text string ADSK-METRIC-25 to display the list of selectable keys that exist for this Sheet Metal Punch. NOTE You must click directly on the text string ADSK-METRIC-25. Clicking the line with the text will not work. 9 Click on ADSK-METRIC-120 to change the selection. 10 Click Refresh in the Punch Tool dialog box to refresh the displayed preview of the Punch iFeature to be placed.

Punch Holes (continued) | 975

11 Click Finish to place the 12-mm diameter Punch iFeature and close the Punch Tool dialog box. 12 Right-click the shared sketch node in the Model browser (the node above the first iFeature node), and click Visibility to remove the check mark and hide the shared sketch geometry. Next, you mirror the punched holes. Previous (page 973) | Next (page 976)

Mirror the Punched Holes

To complete the folded model of your guard, mirror the three punched holes to the face on the opposite side. The Mirror functionality requires a plane to

976 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

mirror across, and due to the steps used to construct this part, you cannot simply use one of the origin planes. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Work Features panel ➤ Plane and select Midplane between Two Parallel Planes from the drop-down menu. 2 In the graphics window, click the outside face shown in the following illustration:

3 Now, rotate the view and click the outside face on the opposite side. The new work plane is created midplane between the two outside faces.

Mirror the Punched Holes | 977

4 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Pattern panel ➤ Mirror. 5 Click in the Model browser to select the iFeature node of the first 2.5-mm Punch. 6 Click again in the Model browser to select the iFeature node of the second 12-mm Punch. 7 Click the Mirror Plane selection arrow in the Mirror dialog box to enable selection of the mirror plane. 8 In the graphics window, click the midplane work plane that you created in the middle of the guard. 9 Click OK to mirror the selected Punch iFeatures and close the Mirror dialog box. Notice that a Mirror node appears in the Model browser.

978 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

The mirrored features now appear on the opposite side of the guard.

Next, you create a flat pattern of your folded model. Previous (page 975) | Next (page 979)

Create the Flat Pattern You have finished adding features to the folded model. Many of these features added bends using the default bending radius. Some of these features left gaps or corner reliefs using rules specified in the active Sheet Metal Rule. When the folded model is flattened, these features result in a flat sheet that can be detailed in preparation for manufacturing. Bend lines and bend extents are shown on the flat pattern and attributes of the punched iFeatures can be recovered during the creation of a drawing of the flat pattern. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Flat Pattern panel ➤ Create Flat Pattern.

Create the Flat Pattern | 979

Because you are working within a sheet metal part that is active within an assembly, the sheet metal part file will be opened in isolation, and the flat pattern will be created.

2 Double-click the Folded Model icon at the top of the Model browser to return to the folded model. NOTE Alternatively, you can also click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Folded Part panel ➤ Go to Folded Part to return to the folded model state. 3 Click Save. 4 Close the copy of the my_2mm_guard file that was opened. 5 Double-click the Cylinder Clamp.iam node at the top of the browser to return to the assembly. 6 Click Save to save the assembly. 7 Close the assembly. Next, you add both a bend and punch table to a partially completed drawing of the guard. Previous (page 976) | Next (page 981)

980 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation

1 Open the file 2mm_inplace_guard_start.idw, located in \Tutorial Files\Cylinder Clamp. NOTE This drawing contains several views of a completed example guard that is supplied with the example tutorial files. 2 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Table panel ➤ General. The Table dialog box displays, and the view selection cursor is active in the graphics window. 3 Move your cursor over the view of the flat pattern until you see the dotted red view boundary highlight.

Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation | 981

4 Click to select the flat pattern view as the source view for the General table. NOTE The General table type provides column selections unique to the type of source view selected. In this case, the table provides bend information. 5 Click OK in the table dialog box to accept the default selections, close the dialog box, and place the table. 6 Move your cursor over the upper-left corner of the drawing border. When your cursor changes to indicate a “point on” constraint, click to place the table.

982 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

A table is created with columns for Bend ID, Bend Direction, Bend Angle, and Bend Radius using the values for each of the bends in the selected view. Also, notice that the Bend ID numbers have been added to the flat pattern view near the bend centerlines. The bend sequence identified is not likely to match the sequence your fabrication shop uses. Modifying the bend order sequence and adjusting the table is covered in the Sheet Metal Parts 2 tutorial. Next, you place a punch table on the drawing. Previous (page 979) | Next (page 983)

Place a Punch Table

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Table panel ➤ Hole View (use the down arrow to the right of Hole to display Hole View). 2 Move your cursor over the view of the flat pattern until you see the dotted red view boundary highlight, and click to select the view. 3 Move the datum target cursor along the lower edge of the flat pattern, until you reach the left-most corner and the “point on” constraint is indicated.

Place a Punch Table | 983

4 Click to select this point as the datum for dimensioning the punched holes. 5 Move the displayed outline of the table to align it with the lower-left corner of the drawing boarder. When the “point on” constraint is indicated, click to place the table.

6 Right-mouse click over the table, and select Edit Hole Table from the context menu to display the Edit Hole Table: View Type dialog box.

984 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

7 Click Column Chooser on the Formatting tab of the dialog box to display the Hole Table Column Chooser dialog box. 8 In this dialog box, select Description from the list of Selected Properties, and click Remove. 9 Select HOLE DIAMETER in the list of Available Properties, and click Add. 10 Select PUNCH ID in the list of Available Properties, and click Add. 11 Click OK to accept the new column arrangement and close the Hole Table Column Chooser dialog box. 12 Click OK in the Edit Hole Table: View Type dialog box to update the table using the new column arrangement and close the dialog box. 13 Save the drawing of the guard flat pattern. Previous (page 981) | Next (page 985)

Summary

Summary | 985

In this tutorial, you learned a basic workflow for creating a sheet metal part and placing sheet metal annotations on a flat pattern drawing. Some key points of this exercise include: ■ Working within the context of an assembly, you were able to use assembly geometry to define key design aspects of your sheet metal part. ■

Sheet metal features are often created on one side or the other of a selection to take into account the material thickness or bend radius.

■

Sheet metal Punch iFeatures simplify the creation of simple and complex cut (and formed) features on your model. Punch iFeatures carry attribution that can be recovered in a Punch table on your drawings.

■

Bends created by features display a bend centerline and bend extents on the flat pattern. These bends can be easily identified in a Bend table on your drawing that contains important manufacturing attributes.

■

The flat pattern of your folded model is easily created and provides an accurate representation of the flattened bend zones between adjacent features. The size of these flattened bend zones are determined by the Unfold Rule defined within the active Sheet Metal Rule used when you begin a new sheet metal model from a template.

What Next? - As a next step, continue to explore sheet metal functionality by completing the Sheet Metal Parts 2 tutorial. Previous (page 983)

986 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Sheet Metal Parts 2

40

About this tutorial

Explore sheet metal functionality. Category

Mechanical Design

987

Time Required

60 minutes

Tutorial File Used

Start a new sheet metal part (metric) contour_roll-start.ipt sm_part2_model-completed.ipt (finished version)

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. Create a lofted flange feature, and then rip and flatten it. Work with the flat pattern to explore many sheet metal features. Objectives ■ Lofted flange features ■

Rip features

■

Bend order sequence

■

Cosmetic centerline features

■

Contour Roll features

■

Unfold features, with features added to the flattened model

■

Added refold features

Prerequisites ■ Complete the tutorial Sheet Metal Parts. ■

Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the various view tools.

■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

■

Ensure that Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is not checked.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 989)

988 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches

The Lofted Flange feature provides a way to create transitional sections in your model. They may be the only (or primary) feature in a model or they may be part of a more complex design. The Lofted Flange feature requires the selection of two profile sketches. The profiles can be open or closed (or one of each) and can be on parallel or non-parallel sketch planes. The resulting feature can be optionally targeted at either a press brake or die-form manufacturing process. 1 To begin this exercise, begin a new sheet metal part using the Sheet Metal (mm).ipt template. 2 In the open sketch, create a 1400-mm circle centered on 0,0.

Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches | 989

3 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. 4 Create a Work Plane offset (up) from the XY Origin Plane by 2000 mm. 5 On this new offset Work Plane, create a 2D sketch. 6 In the sketch create a 600 mm x 600-mm square. Apply 300-mm dimensions so that the square is centered on 0,0. 7 Place a point on the mid-point of one side of the square. NOTE This point is not required for the Lofted Flange; however, you will use it later to create a Rip feature to flatten the Lofted Flange.

990 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

8 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. 9 Hide the work plane that you created and the XY origin plane (if displayed). Hide the dimensions on both Sketch1 and Sketch2. Your model should appear as shown in the following image from the default Home View (F6).

Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches | 991

Next, you create the Lofted Flange. Previous (page 987) | Next (page 993)

992 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Lofted Flange - Create the Flange 1 Before you create the Lofted Flange, on the ribbon click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Setup panel ➤ Sheet Metal Defaults, or right-click and select Sheet Metal Defaults from the marking menu. 2 In the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box, clear the Use Thickness from Rule option. Enter a value of 4 mm in the Thickness value entry field. 3 Click OK to accept the new material thickness and close the dialog box. 4 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Lofted Flange. 5 In the graphics window, click to select the sketched square as Profile 1. 6 Click to select the sketched circle as Profile 2. A preview of the resulting Lofted Flange displays using the default settings. 7 Since Press Brake is the selected Output option, the preview shows a Lofted Flange that can be created using straight bends. This results in a faceted approximation of the circle. There are three methods that you can use to adjust the resulting facets. In this exercise, you increase the default value for the Chord Value. Highlight the value of 0.5 mm, and enter a new value of 4 mm. Notice that your preview adjusts to show fewer facets. NOTE If you have die-forming fabrication available, you can optionally select Die Form as the Output option. Doing so results in a smooth, conical transition from the circular profile to the square profile. 8 Another optional selection determines if the material thickness is on one side or the other of the sketched profile. To see this better, zoom in to the point that you created on the square profile sketch. By default, the material is offset to the outside of the selected profile. In this exercise, you want the dimensioned size of the profile to represent the outside of the resulting part. The material must be offset to the inside of the profile. Click the middle Flip Side.

Lofted Flange - Create the Flange | 993

Notice the material thickness now previews to the inside of the profile. 9 Click OK in the Lofted Flange dialog box to accept the edits you have made, create the Lofted Flange, and close the dialog box.

Because you selected two closed profiles to create this Lofted Flange, the model will not currently create a flat pattern. Next, you add a Rip feature to allow the model to flatten. Previous (page 989) | Next (page 994)

Rip Like its physical counterpart, a folded sheet metal model that forms a continuous tube-like shape cannot be flattened. The Rip feature provides an easy way to create a cut in a face of the model that will allow the flat pattern to be produced.

994 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

To create a Rip feature, you select a face of the model and (optionally) either one or two points that lie on the selected face. If you select an outside face, any points selected must be on an edge of the outside face. Optionally, you might select an entire face to be removed. TIP In this exercise, the point used to locate the Rip feature was added to one of the Lofted Flange profile sketches. Another technique is to create a 2D sketch on a flat face of a Lofted Flange targeted for Press Brake output. Then place a point at a strategic vertex or edge midpoint. 1 In the Model browser, click the + to the left of Lofted Flange1. Right-click Sketch2, and select Visibility in the context menu to make Sketch2 visible. 2 Adjust your view of the model so that the edge of the sketched square which contains the point is visible on top.

3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rip. 4 Select the face to be ripped (which contains the sketch point along the edge).

Rip | 995

5 Select the point you previously created that defines the location of the single-point Rip.

996 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

With the point selected, the Rip feature previews.

Rip | 997

NOTE The Rip can cut a bend face adjacent to the selected face; however, a rip cannot cut across a bend face and through a second face. In this example, if the point was located anywhere other than the midpoint of the edge, the rip could not be created. 6 Click OK in the Rip dialog box to create the Rip feature and close the dialog box. 7 In the Model browser, right-mouse select Sketch2, and click Visibility in the pop-up context menu to switch off Sketch2 visibility. Previous (page 993) | Next (page 998)

Rip (continued) The previous Rip feature exercise directed you to create a sketch point to serve as the rip point. While the creation of sketch points are required for certain rip workflows, there are many instances where sketch points are not necessary. Inventor also accepts work points, midpoints on edges, or endpoints on face vertices as valid rip point selections.

998 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Now, you will delete the rip feature and try creating it once again. But this time, you will use the midpoint on the top edge of the 600mm x 600mm square as the rip point. 1 First, make sure that the Sketch2 visibility is turned off as previously directed. 2 Next, right-click the Rip node in the Model browser and select Delete from the pop-up context menu. Your model should appear as shown.

3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rip. 4 As you did before, select the identical top face to rip.

Rip (continued) | 999

5 Next, move your cursor to the midpoint of the top edge. When the midpoint appears, click to select.

1000 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

6 With the midpoint selected, the Rip feature previews.

Rip (continued) | 1001

7 Click OK in the Rip dialog box to create the Rip feature and close the dialog box. Next, you will create a flat pattern of the ripped Lofted Flange. Previous (page 994) | Next (page 1003)

1002 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange

Now that the Lofted Flange has had a Rip feature applied it is no longer a continuous closed shape. It is now possible to create a flat pattern suitable for manufacture. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Flat Pattern panel ➤ Create Flat Pattern.

Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange | 1003

The flat pattern displays the bend centerlines and the bend extent lines which indicate the bend zones required to flatten the lofted flange. NOTE You can easily add a Rip feature to a lofted flange created from two closed profiles and generate a valid flat pattern. Your manufacturing shop may prefer to fabricate this type of part as two pieces. Using this flat pattern, you next explore Bend Order Annotation. Previous (page 998) | Next (page 1005)

1004 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Bend Order Annotation To accommodate efficient manufacturing, bends must often be created on the shop floor in a specific sequence. The manufacturing sequence has little in common with the design sequence. Using the flat pattern you currently have open, you can explore modifications to the bend order sequence. 1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Bend Order Annotation.

Notice that a series of numbers appear within circles with a yellow background. As you proceed, focus on these numbered symbols in the upper portion of the flat pattern:

Bend Order Annotation | 1005

As you can see, these numbers do not currently have a logical sequence:

1006 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Next, you explore creating a directed sequence of bend overrides. NOTE Do not be concerned if the order of the numbered symbols on your flat pattern differ from those shown in the images. Previous (page 1003) | Next (page 1007)

Directed Reorder 1 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Directed Reorder from the pop-up context menu. The Directed Reorder method of applying bend sequence overrides requires that you select a beginning bend and an ending bend. The system applies a new bend order sequence between the selected bends.

Directed Reorder | 1007

2 Click the upper-most bend symbol (labeled A in the previous image) to select the starting position of the override sequence. 3 Click the lower-most bend symbol (labeled B) to select the ending position. Notice that the symbols all change from yellow circles to green squares.

1008 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Also notice that the numbering sequence has been changed. The bend you selected as the starting position is now numbered 1. The remaining bends are numbered in sequence to the bend that you selected as the ending position.

Directed Reorder | 1009

Next, you explore creating a sequential reorder of bend identification overrides. Previous (page 1005) | Next (page 1010)

Sequential Reorder If you were happy with the sequence you obtained, you can right-click and select Done, then right-click again and select Finish Bend Order. Alternatively, pressing Esc twice is equivalent to selecting Done and Finish Bend Order from the pop-up context menu. Since this is an exercise, you will not keep the directed sequence that you created. 1 Right-click, and select Remove All Overrides from the pop-up context menu. Notice that the green squares revert to yellow circles and the numbering sequence returns to the initial sequence generated by Autodesk Inventor. 2 Right-click again, and select Sequential Reorder from the pop-up context menu.

1010 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Use sequential reordering to pick bends manually in the order that you need them to be manufactured. 3 Beginning again with the upper-most bend, click every other bend. As you click a bend, notice that the yellow circle again changes to a green square. The numbers change to correspond to the selected sequence. Click two or three more bends until you get the feel of this technique.

As explained previously, when you are happy with the reordered sequence, press Esc twice, or use Done followed by Finish Bend Order from the context menu. 4 Since this is an exercise, right-click again and select Remove All Overrides from the context menu followed, by Finish Bend Order to exit the command. NOTE In a third method of editing the bend order, you select a single, individual bend and change the bend order identification. Next, you explore converting lines sketched on your flat pattern into cosmetic centerlines. Previous (page 1007) | Next (page 1012)

Sequential Reorder | 1011

Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched Lines Cosmetic centerlines are straight lines sketched on a flat pattern that are converted to bend lines with bend extent lines. They represent bends that do not exist in your folded model, possibly stiffening creases or a bend line you want to place on a die-formed portion of your flat pattern. Cosmetic centerlines carry bend attributes that can be recovered in drawings. They can be sequenced using the Bend Order Annotation techniques explored in the previous exercise. 1 Click to select the face of the flat pattern.

1012 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

NOTE If you did not clear the Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit application option, as specified in the Prerequisites at the beginning of this tutorial, the sketch and all subsequent sketches made in this tutorial will have unneeded projected geometry. 2 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ Create 2D Sketch, or right-click and select New Sketch from the marking menu. 3 Click OK in the dialog box that displays the message Edits to the flat pattern are exclusively applied to the flat pattern and will not be reflected on the folded model. 4 Sketch two straight lines as shown:

Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched Lines | 1013

NOTE In this example, the size and position are not critical so dimensions will not be applied. In your designs, you will likely want to apply dimensions to position these lines accurately. 5 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. Next, you convert the sketched lines to cosmetic centerlines.

1014 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Previous (page 1010) | Next (page 1015)

Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines 1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Cosmetic Centerline, or right-click and select Cosmetic Centerline from the marking menu. The Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box displays, and bend direction information appears on the existing bends in the flat pattern. The Sketched Bend Lines selection cursor is active. 2 Select the two straight lines that you added to the sketch. Notice that the bend direction for these two lines differs from the bend direction of the other bends. This may or may not suit your purposes. To minimize material handling during the creation of this example part, you change the bend direction. 3 Click the Specifies Bend Up or Bend Down button in the Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box to change the bend direction attribute.

Notice that the displayed bend attributes of the sketched lines now match the displayed bend attributes of the other bend lines on the flat pattern. 4 Change the Bend Angle value to 3 degrees in the Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box. 5 Click OK in the Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box to create the cosmetic centerlines using the specified attributes and close the dialog box. Notice that the sketched lines now display using the Bend Centerline linetype. Using the techniques learned in the Bend Order Annotation exercise, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Bend Order Annotation, or right-click and select Bend Order from the marking menu. Notice that the cosmetic centerlines now participate in the bend order sequence.

Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines | 1015

These cosmetic centerlines can now be included in bend tables and bend notes you create in your drawings. 6 Click the Esc key to exit Bend Order Annotation. 7 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Folded Part panel ➤ Go to Folded Part, or right-click and select Go to Folded Part from the marking menu, to return to the folded model state. 8 You can Save your exercise file; however, the file is not used in further exercises. 9 Close the file that you have been using for these exercises. Next, you will add Contour Roll features to a supplied sheet metal part. Previous (page 1012) | Next (page 1017)

1016 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Contour Roll

Creating digital prototypes of roll formed sheet metal parts in Autodesk Inventor requires using a Contour Roll feature. The Contour Roll command creates a feature like a Contour Flange that uses a sketched profile as well as a sketched axis of revolution. The profile and axis geometry must exist within the same sketch. In this exercise, you open a file that contains a straight Contour Flange feature. You add two Contour Roll features and a final Contour Flange. You then create a flat pattern of the resulting folded model. 1 Set your project to tutorial_files. 2 Open Sheet Metal Parts 2 ➤ contour_roll-start.ipt.

Contour Roll | 1017

3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ Create 2D Sketch, or right-click and select New Sketch from the marking menu. 4 When prompted to select a plane or sketch, select the top face of the Contour Flange feature as shown:

1018 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

NOTE All sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you recently completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, you have undisplayed the sketch grid by changing the Application Options. This tutorial does not require the use of the sketch grid and may be completed with the grid displayed or undisplayed. Next, you project edges into the sketch. Previous (page 1015) | Next (page 1019)

Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry In this exercise, you project the edges of the existing Contour Flange and add a straight line as the axis of revolution. However, you can use any open profile consisting of lines, arcs, splines, and elliptical arcs to create a Contour Roll feature.

Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry | 1019

NOTE The Contour Roll feature will transform sharp sketch corners into bends in the finished part using the bend radius value. This behavior is like the Contour Flange feature and is not apparent in the following exercise. 1 If necessary, orient your sketch using the View Cube or View Face so that you are looking at the sketch plane. 2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Project Geometry, or right-click and select Project Geometry from the marking menu. 3 In the graphics window, click to select the lines and arcs that define the outside edge of the Contour Flange feature as shown:

NOTE Be sure to select individual lines and arcs rather than the face loop of the detail faces. 4 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line, or right-click and select Line from the marking menu.

1020 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

5 Create a line to represent your axis of revolution as shown:

NOTE The length of this line is not important; however, the line should be parallel to the short, horizontal line segments that you projected into your sketch. You can either imply the parallel constraint as you draw the line or add a parallel constraint after the line has been drawn.

Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry | 1021

6 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension, or right-click and select General Dimension from the marking menu. Place a 100-mm dimension between the line you created and the short, horizontal line segment that you projected into your sketch. 7 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. 8 If necessary, right-click and select Home View from the overflow menu (or press F6) to reorient your view to an isometric view. Previous (page 1017) | Next (page 1022)

Create a Contour Roll 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Contour Roll. The Contour Roll dialog box displays, you are prompted to select an open profile. 2 In the graphics window, click the edge geometry that you projected into your sketch. The selected geometry highlights, and the Axis selection button becomes active. 3 In the graphics window, click the straight line that you created parallel to the projected edge and then offset with a 100-mm dimension. A 90 degree Contour Roll section previews; however, what is previewed is not what you want for this exercise. 4 Clear the default Rolled Angle value of 90 deg degrees and enter 30 deg into the value field. Your preview should now appear as follows:

1022 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

5 Click OK to create the 30-degree Contour Roll segment and close the dialog box. Next, you repeat these steps with a few minor differences to create a similar Contour Roll that sweeps 30 degrees in the opposite direction. Previous (page 1019) | Next (page 1023)

Create a Second Contour Roll 1 Repeat the steps you used to create the Contour Roll feature, using the end face of the edge of the first Contour Roll as the new sketch plane:

Create a Second Contour Roll | 1023

2 As you did previously, project the outside edges of the sheet metal material, and then add a straight line segment. This straight line segment should be on the side of (and parallel to) the long horizontal projection and offset by 100 mm. For the previous contour roll, the axis of revolution was on the side of the two short horizontal segments. By putting the axis on the opposite side of the profile, the revolution will curve in the opposite direction when you create this contour roll.

1024 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

3 With your sketch completed, create the Contour Roll feature. Notice that the Rolled Angle value is 30 degrees, the last value you used in this command. It is the value you will use for this second contour roll. Your preview should appear as shown in the following image.

Create a Second Contour Roll | 1025

4 Click OK to create the second 30-degree contour roll segment and close the dialog box. As a final modeling step, you will use the same sketch and project edges technique to create a sketch to use for a second contour flange. Previous (page 1022) | Next (page 1026)

Add another Contour Flange 1 Repeat the steps you used to create the Contour Roll feature, using the end face of the edge of the second Contour Roll as the new sketch plane. 2 As you did previously, project the outside edges of the sheet metal material. You are now ready to create the Contour Flange feature.

1026 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Contour Flange. The Contour Flange dialog box displays. Select the profile you just projected. Expand the dialog box using More (>> in the lower right), and use the Width Extents type of Distance and a value of 200 mm. 4 Click OK to create the second 200-mm Contour Flange segment and close the dialog box. Your completed model should appear similar to the following image. Adjust your view of the model as needed.

Next, you create a flat pattern. Previous (page 1023) | Next (page 1028)

Add another Contour Flange | 1027

Flatten the Rolled Tube Because the Contour Flanges and Contour Roll features have formed an open tube, you can create a flat pattern without adding any additional features. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Flat Pattern panel ➤ Create Flat Pattern. The flat pattern is created. The Flat Pattern tab displays as the active ribbon tab.

1028 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

The flat pattern displays the bend centerlines and bend extents for the four 90-degree bends that form the square tube, It also displays as the two roll centerlines for the two 30-degree rolls created by the Contour Roll features. Bend centerlines, bend extents, roll centerlines, and roll extents are all exported to separate layers when a flat pattern is exported to DWG or DXF formats to facilitate flexibility in CNC manufacturing.

Flatten the Rolled Tube | 1029

In the final portion of this tutorial, you explore the use of the Unfold and Refold feature. You unroll and unfold the model that you created, adding some features and then refolding and rerolling the model. Previous (page 1026) | Next (page 1030)

Unfold and Refold Feature Pair There are some features that are easier to create when the model is flat. Use the Unfold feature to unfold (or unroll) all or some of the bends (or rolls) within your model. With the model unfolded, you can then add features and use Refold features to return the model to the folded state. In this portion of the tutorial, you unroll the two Contour Roll features and unfold two of the four bends that form the square tube. You add a hole which you will pattern down the length of the part. To complete the exercise, you add two Refold features to refold and reroll the model. The completed model will appear as shown in the following image.

1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Folded Part panel ➤ Go to Folded Part, or right-click and select Go to Folded Part from the marking menu, to return to the folded model.

1030 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

NOTE Alternatively, you can also double-click the Folded Model node in the Model browser to return to the folded model state. 2 If necessary, right-click and select Home View from the pop-up context menu (or press F6) to change the view to an isometric orientation. 3 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Unfold. The Unfold dialog box displays, and two stationary reference planes appear at either end of the Contour Roll features.

4 In this exercise, we first unroll the Contour Roll features. Click in the graphics window to select the lower stationary reference plane.

Unfold and Refold Feature Pair | 1031

Once you select a stationary reference, the rolls that can be unrolled relative to that reference are highlighted. Next, you continue with additional Unfold selection steps. Previous (page 1028) | Next (page 1032)

Continue Unfold Selection 1 Click to select the lower curved face as shown in the following image.

1032 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

As you select faces, the preview shows the model state that results by unrolling the selection.

Continue Unfold Selection | 1033

2 In this exercise, we straighten the tube completely. Click the upper curved face (not the preview graphic) to select the second rolled face.

1034 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Once the second rolled face is selected, the model again previews the unroll results.

Continue Unfold Selection | 1035

3 Click Apply in the Unfold dialog box to straighten the model as shown in the preview and to reset the dialog box for the next round of unfolds. Next, you unfold two of the 90 degree bends which form the square tube. Previous (page 1030) | Next (page 1036)

Partially Unfold the Tube Use the Unfold feature to pick the bends that you want to flatten. It is not necessary to flatten the model completely. It is possible to add the linear hole pattern. For this exercise, with the model unrolled in its current state, you will first unfold an additional two 90-degree bends. 1 As with the unrolled model that you created, you first identify a stationary face. Click the face shown in the following image.

1036 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

As soon as you select the face shown, the bends that can be unfolded relative to that face highlight:

Partially Unfold the Tube | 1037

2 Click to select the bend which forms the 90-degree corner closest to you:

1038 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Once the bend is selected, the part previews in the unfolded state.

Partially Unfold the Tube | 1039

Next, you finish creating the Unfold feature. Previous (page 1032) | Next (page 1040)

Complete the Unfold Feature 1 Click to select the second 90-degree bend as shown in the following image.

1040 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Following the select, the unfolded bend is previewed:

Complete the Unfold Feature | 1041

2 Click OK in the Unfold dialog box to flatten the two bends as shown in the preview and to close the dialog box. Your model should now appear as shown in the following image.

1042 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Although these steps are not required to add the holes (that you will add next) they illustrate adding an Unfold feature to flatten straight bends. Notice that your feature browser now contains two Unfold features: one for the unfolding of the two contour rolls and one for the unfolding of the two straight bends. Next, you add a hole and pattern the hole so that it crosses the (now flat) faces of the Contour Roll features. Previous (page 1036) | Next (page 1044)

Complete the Unfold Feature | 1043

Add a Hole 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ Create 2D Sketch, or right-click and select 2D Sketch from the marking menu. Then select the face shown in the following image.

2 Reorient your view, if necessary, using the View Cube or View Face commands, so that you are looking directly at the sketch. 3 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point. Drag over the projected origin point, and then up. You should see the dotted line which indicates that the point you will place is aligned with the origin point.

1044 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

4 Click to place the point. 5 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension, or right-click and select General Dimension from the marking menu. Now, place a 25-mm dimension between the point and the bottom edge of the unfolded part.

Add a Hole | 1045

6 Finish the sketch and exit the sketch environment. 7 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Hole, and place a 5-mm diameter hole with a Through All termination on the sketched point. Next, you pattern the hole. Previous (page 1040) | Next (page 1046)

Pattern the Hole 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Pattern panel ➤ Rectangular. 2 Select the hole as the feature to pattern. 3 Click the Direction 1 button and select a vertical edge and direction as shown:

1046 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

4 Enter a value of 20 for the total number of holes, and a value of 25 mm for the distance between each hole. 5 Click OK to create the pattern of holes that cross the two flattened roll faces and close the Rectangular Pattern dialog box. Next, you add two Refold features to return the flattened model to the folded and rolled state.

Pattern the Hole | 1047

Previous (page 1044) | Next (page 1048)

Add Two Refold Features The Refold feature is the complement of the Unfold feature. You are not able to place a Refold feature unless there is an Unfold feature in the model. When there are more than one Unfold features in the model, you must refold them in reverse order. You must refold the most recently created Unfold feature first. Although there are several Refold workflows, in this exercise you use the most common workflow. You right-click to select the Unfold feature and select Refold Feature in the pop-up context menu. This method automatically selects the originally selected stationary face and which ever bends or rolls were originally selected to create the Unfold feature. Other Refold workflows provide more flexibility and allow partial refolding when that makes sense for your design situation. 1 Right-click the Unfold feature in the Model browser that is immediately above the Hole feature. Select Refold Feature in the pop-up context menu. Notice that the two 90-degree straight bends refold, and that a Refold feature is added to the list of features in the Model browser. 2 Right-click the first Unfold feature (between the Contour Flange feature and the second Unfold feature), and select Refold Feature. Notice that the two 30-degree Contour Roll features reroll and that a second Refold feature is added to the list of features in the Model browser. The completed model will appear as shown in the following image.

1048 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

This completes the exercises of this tutorial. Previous (page 1046) | Next (page 1050)

Add Two Refold Features | 1049

Summary

The features you explored in this tutorial represent powerful additions to your sheet metal modeling skills. ■ Transitional shapes defined by selecting two profiles for a Lofted Flange feature are common in some sheet metal design situations. ■

The ability to define the output of a Lofted Flange targeted at either a Press Brake or Die Form manufacturing process provides flexibility in both design and manufacturing.

■

The ease of adding a Rip feature to a Lofted Flange created from two closed profiles provides for ease of flat pattern creation during the design process.

■

Bend Order Annotation on the sheet metal flat pattern allows documentation of the correct fabrication sequence.

■

The ability to add cosmetic centerlines provides additional efficiencies by allowing the documentation of bends that have not been created in the folded model state.

1050 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

■

Certain features are easier to create while the model is flat: Unfold and Refold features allow efficient creation of these features while showing them correctly in both the final folded model and the flat pattern.

What Next? As a next step, consider exploring the creation of Lofted Flange features with two open profiles. Or, create a variation of the folded and rolled square tube with cut features that cross over both the 90-degree square corner bend as well as the 30-degree rolled faces. You can also explore the capabilities of the Inventor Studio environment which was used to create several of the photorealistic images that were used in this tutorial. Previous (page 1048)

Summary | 1051

1052

Sheet Metal Styles

41

1053

About this tutorial

Control sheet metal characteristics. Category

Mechanical Design

Time Required

25 minutes

Tutorial File Used

electrical box.ipt

1054 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. In this tutorial, you capture and manipulate the following sheet metal characteristics using sheet metal styles: ■ Complete material definition ■

Bend relief shape and size

■

Bend radius value

■

Bend transition type

■

2-bend corner relief type and size

■

3-bend corner relief type and size

Various style types, or style categories, control sheet metal characteristics. The style types, when taken together, create a composite style that determines the characteristics of a sheet metal part. You can apply styles locally to the active part, or you can save new styles and style edits to the Style Library to share the styles. Objectives ■ Create new styles. ■

Save the styles to the Style Library.

■

Use Sheet Metal Defaults to apply styles to a sheet metal part.

■

Edit the styles.

■

Apply a library style change to a part.

Prerequisites ■ Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding. ■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 1056)

About this tutorial | 1055

Edit the Project and Open the Sample File Later in the tutorial, you write style information to the Style Library. The library must be set to Read/Write. You use the Projects editor to make this setting.

1 Click

➤ Manage ➤ Projects.

2 Double-click the tutorial_files project to make this project active. 3 In the lower panel of the Project editor dialog box, if Use Style Library is Read Only or No, right-click this setting and select Yes. This value sets the Style Library to Read/Write. 4 Click Save and then Done. 5 Openelectrical box.ipt, located in the Electrical Box folder.

1056 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

Previous (page 1054) | Next (page 1057)

Add a New Material In this portion of the tutorial, you add a new material to the document. 1 On the Tools tab ➤ Material and Appearance panel ➤ Materials . The Material Browser displays. The Material Browser has two sections: ■ Document Materials, upper section ■

Library Materials, lower section

2 The new material can be made from an existing one. In the library section, if not already selected, select Inventor Material Library. 3 In the library list, on the right, scroll to locate Steel - Mild. Double click the material in the list. The material is added to the document and opened in the Material Editor. 4 In the Material Editor, change the material name to Steel - Test. 5 Before continuing, in the Asset section, select the structural asset. Note the properties making up the material listed in the pane below. When making new materials you can modify some properties, others are determined by the material Type and Class to which the asset is assigned. In addition, the new material is not currently saved in the part file. If you close the part without saving, this new material is lost. Previous (page 1056) | Next (page 1057)

Change the Appearance 1 Ensure Steel - Test is selected in the Material browser. 2 In the Asset section of the Material Editor, select the Appearance asset. 3 To the right, click 4 In the Asset Browser, select the Appearance named Steel - Galvanized 5 Click . You can also use double-click to select and exchange an appearance in one step.

Add a New Material | 1057

6 Close the Material Editor. 7 Select the component and in the Material Browser, select the new material Steel - Test. The part has the new material and appearance. 8 Close the Material Browser. Previous (page 1057) | Next (page 1058)

Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gauge and Material Next, you define a new sheet metal rule style that includes a sheet metal gauge and material, along with bend and corner relief attributes. To define the gauge and material: 1 On the ribbon, click {Condition: product='inv'}{Condition: product='inv'}

Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor

1058 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

.

The browser on the left side of the Styles and Standards Editor lists three style types or style categories: ■

Lighting

■

Sheet Metal Rule

■

Sheet Metal Unfold

Unique styles are nested under each of these top-level nodes. Expand the Sheet Metal Rule style category in the browser. 2 Right-click the Default node, and select New Style from the pop-up context menu. Name the new style Sheet Metal Rule Style Test. Click OK to close the New Local Style dialog box. 3 Ensure that the new style is selected in the browser, and that the Sheet tab is selected. 4 Select Steel, Mild from the Material menu. 5 Specify a thickness of .105 in.

Previous (page 1057) | Next (page 1060)

Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gauge and Material | 1059

Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and Corner Relief Now, define the bend and corner relief attributes: 1 Select the Bend tab. 2 Change the Bend Radius from Thickness to Thickness * 1.15.

3 Select the Corner tab. 4 Change the 2 Bend Intersection relief shape to Square. 5 Change the Relief Size to Thickness * 5.

1060 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

6 Right-click Sheet Metal Rule Style Test in the browser, and select Active from the pop-up context menu. If you receive an error message, click Accept. The error is not critical in this exercise. 7 Click Save in the Style and Standard Editor dialog box. If a message box displays, click Accept. The program applies the bend radius and corner relief style attributes to the part.

Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and Corner Relief | 1061

8 Click Done. TIP In the tutorial, click Undo and Redo on the Quick Access toolbar to see the effects of the style changes. Be sure to redo all changes before continuing. 9 Save the part to prevent the new styles from being lost. The new styles are now preserved locally in this part. Previous (page 1058) | Next (page 1062)

Save Styles to Library 1 With the sample part open, on the ribbon select Manage tab ➤ Styles

and Standards panel ➤ Save next to the Styles Editor command.

. The command is located

2 In the Save to Library? column, set Sheet Metal Style Rule Test to Yes.

1062 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

3 Click OK. The program notifies you that the operation overwrites styles in the library. 4 Click Yes. Any style marked Yes is saved to the Styles Library. They can be shared from part to part, and shared with anyone who has access to the project. TIP You can also save styles to the style library in the Style and Standard Editor. Right-click a style in the browser, and select Save to Style Library. 5 Save and close the part. Previous (page 1060) | Next (page 1063)

Create Sample Part In this portion of the tutorial, you create some simple sheet metal geometry and then apply styles to the part. 1 Click the New icon , located at the top of the application window. Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next to the icon. 2 In the Create New File dialog box, click the English folder, and then

double-click the Sheet Metal (in).ipt template

.

3 Sketch a rectangle approximately 10 inches square. The exact size and shape is not important.

Create Sample Part | 1063

4 Click the Finish Sketch command on the ribbon, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu to exit the sketch.

5 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Face also right-click and select Face from the marking menu.

. You can

6 Accept the default dialog box settings, and then click OK. Next, you add two flanges. 7 Click the Flange command from the ribbon or the marking menu.

. 8 Select two adjacent edges.

1064 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

9 Click OK. The default template uses the default sheet metal styles. Next, you use Sheet Metal Defaults to apply the new styles to the part. TIP If you routinely use a certain style set, create a sheet metal part template that uses those styles by default. Previous (page 1062) | Next (page 1065)

Use Sheet Metal Defaults You use Sheet Metal Defaults to apply different styles to the active sheet metal part. The changes are local to the part. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Setup panel ➤ Sheet

Metal Defaults , or right-click and select Sheet Metal Defaults from the marking menu. Because you saved the styles you created to the Style Library, they are available for application in this part. 2 From the Sheet Metal Rule drop-down menu, select Sheet Metal Rule Style Test.

Use Sheet Metal Defaults | 1065

3 Ensure the Use Thickness from Rule option is selected. The Thickness input field is disabled, and the thickness you specified for Sheet Metal Rule Style Test is shown in the field. 4 From the Material drop-down menu, select Steel - Test.

5 Click Apply. The program applies the styles to the part.

1066 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

6 For confirmation purposes, you can use the commands on the Tools tab, Measure panel to run a couple of checks. ■ The sheet thickness is 0.105 in, as specified in Sheet Metal Rule Style Test.

■

The bend radius is 0.121 in, per the style specification of Thickness * 1.15 (0.105 * 1.15).

Use Sheet Metal Defaults | 1067

■

In addition, the corner is square, per the Sheet Metal Rule Test Style.

1068 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

Previous (page 1063) | Next (page 1069)

Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing Styles With Sheet Metal Defaults, you can quickly apply different styles to the part in a wholesale manner. You can also directly access the Styles and Standards Editor through the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box to make edits to the styles themselves. 1 If you closed the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box to use the Measure panel commands, select the Sheet Metal Defaults command again

from the ribbon or the marking menu

.

2 Click the Edit button next to the Sheet Metal Rule menu.

Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing Styles | 1069

3 Select the Corner tab, and then change the Relief Size value to Thickness * 4. 4 Click Save. The program applies the style change to the part.

Previous (page 1065) | Next (page 1071)

1070 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

Update Styles On the previous page, the edit you made to the Rule Style Test style was only applied locally (the active part). To make the edit available globally, save that style to the Style Library. 1 In the Style and Standard Editor, right-click Sheet Metal Rule Style Test (under the Sheet Metal Rule node in the browser) and select Save to Style Library in the pop-up context menu. 2 Click Done to close the editor. 3 The edited and globally saved style is not picked up automatically by parts that share the style. Update that style in any other part that uses the style. 4 Close the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box. 5 Openelectrical box.ipt. TIP Select the file from the Recent Documents section of the Application menu. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Styles and Standards panel ➤ Update

. 7 In the Update Styles dialog box, set the Update? column for Sheet Metal Rule Style Test to Yes. 8 Click OK. A message appears stating that the library style definition will overwrite local style edits. 9 Click Yes. If a message box displays, click Accept. The edit that you made to Sheet Metal Rule Style Test (the change in corner relief size) is applied to this part. 10 Closeelectrical box.ipt. Previous (page 1069) | Next (page 1071)

Sheet Metal Defaults and the Flat Pattern Finally, you can also use Sheet Metal Defaults when the flat pattern is active.

Update Styles | 1071

The sample part you created should still be open. 1 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Flat Pattern panel ➤ Create Flat

Pattern

.

2 Next, click Sheet Metal Defaults

.

3 From the Sheet Metal Rule drop-down menu, select Default. 4 From the Unfold Rule drop-down menu, select Steel 16 Ga_KFactor. 5 Click OK. The changes are applied to the part.

Previous (page 1071) | Next (page 1073)

1072 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

Summary

In this tutorial, you: ■ Created new styles. ■

Saved the styles to the Style Library.

■

Used Sheet Metal Defaults to apply styles to a sheet metal part.

■

Edited the styles.

■

Applied a library style change to a part.

Summary | 1073

Remember to check Help for further details. Previous (page 1071)

1074 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

42

Frame Generator

About this tutorial

Build structural frames. Category

Mechanical Design

Time Required

55 minutes

1075

Tutorial Files Used

Start a new assembly file frame_generator.ipt frame_generator_hybrid.ipt

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. In this tutorial, you create structural frame assemblies in a standards-based, automated fashion with Frame Generator. First you use a predefined skeletal model consisting of unconsumed sketches to determine the placement and extent of frame components, such as square tubing and c-channel. Then you fit those components together with miters and cuts. Finally, you use a hybrid model consisting of a solid and sketches to place the frame components. The Frame Generator process saves extensive assembly and part modeling. Objectives ■ Select and position frame components. ■

Trim excess material.

■

Create miter joints.

■

Create notched cuts.

■

Make edits to the assembly.

Prerequisites ■ Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various view tools, and work with components in the assembly environment. ■

Understand the Help topic “Getting Started.”

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 1077)

1076 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Get Started Frame Generator uses frame members contained in the Content Center. To begin, set your active project, and then verify that Content Center is installed and configured.

1 Click

➤ Manage ➤ Projects.

2 In the Projects dialog box, double-click the tutorial_files project in the projects list to set it as the active project. 3 In the lower-right corner of the Projects dialog box, click Configure Content Center Libraries. 4 In the Configure Libraries dialog box, verify that the Din and ISO Content Center libraries are available. 5 Close all dialog boxes. NOTE The Content Center libraries must be configured and available to perform the tutorial steps. If no libraries are available, install and configure the Content Center libraries before starting the tutorial. See the Help for more details, or contact your CAD Administrator. Previous (page 1075) | Next (page 1077)

Skeletal Model This tutorial uses a skeletal model to position and create frame members. Create an assembly and place the skeletal model. 1 Create a new, blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iam template. 2 Place one occurrence of frame_generator.ipt located in the Frame Generator folder into the assembly.

Get Started | 1077

This part consists of one 2D and one 3D sketch that together define the sample skeletal model. You use this part model to define the placement and extent of frame components in the assembly. 3 Save the assembly using Skeletal.iam for the name. Previous (page 1077) | Next (page 1079)

1078 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Insert Profile The Frame Generator commands are located in the Frame panel of the Design tab. We start by inserting frame members on the four upright lines. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Insert Frame

. 2 Select ISO from the Standard menu. 3 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Rectangular) from the Family menu. 4 Select 250x150x10 from the Size menu. 5 Select the upright sketch line as shown in the image. Ensure that you select somewhere on the upper half of the line. The position of the frame member is partially dependent on which half of a given line you select.

Insert Profile | 1079

6 The tube previews as shown in the image. Select the other three upright lines.

1080 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

NOTE To remove a line from the selection, press and hold Ctrl and then select the line again, or select the profile preview. Previous (page 1077) | Next (page 1081)

Profile Orientation By default, the tube profiles are centered on the selected sketch lines.

The orientation indicator corresponds to the selected sketch line.

Profile Orientation | 1081

1 Click the middle radio button to the right of the profile preview image. The profile preview in the graphics window shifts position relative the sketch line to match the position of the orientation indicator.

1082 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 Click the center radio button to return to the default orientation. The previews update accordingly. The Offset fields control the distance by which the profile is offset from the selected sketch line. 3 Enter 300 mm in the Horizontal Offset field (labeled with the

Horizontal Offset icon).

Profile Orientation | 1083

The Mirror Frame Member command controls the profile orientation relative to the selected geometry, in this case a sketch line. 4 Click Mirror Frame Member, and notice the offset direction swaps in the graphics window.

1084 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Return the profiles to the original orientation: click Mirror Frame Member again, and enter 0 in the Horizontal Offset field.

Profile Orientation | 1085

Previous (page 1079) | Next (page 1086)

Create Profile We must make one last adjustment to the orientation before creating the frame members. 1 Click the arrow next to the Angle field, and then select 90.00 deg from the menu.

2 Click Apply. 3 Click OK in the Create New Frame dialog box.

1086 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

The Frame Member Naming dialog box displays. This dialog box is used to change member display names, member file names, and locations. 4 Click OK without making changes. Whenever this dialog box appears in the tutorial, click OK without making changes in the dialog box. NOTE If you press Cancel during the frame member naming, the frame members are created using the default names. The profiles are created, and you can continue to make other profile selections.

Previous (page 1081) | Next (page 1087)

Place the Upper C-channel Now we insert a c-channel on the upper horizontal lines. 1 Select ISO 657/11 - 1980(E) from the Family menu. 2 Select CH 250 x 34 from the Size menu. 3 Select the sketch line as shown in the image.

Place the Upper C-channel | 1087

The preview shows the profile is upside down (relative to the design intent for this model).

1088 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

4 Select 270.00 deg from the Angle menu.

Place the Upper C-channel | 1089

Previous (page 1086) | Next (page 1090)

Orient the Upper C-channel The orientation of the c-channel must be changed to meet the design intent. 1 Click the radio button to move the orientation indicators, as shown, so that the top of the c-channel is flush with the ends of the tubes.

1090 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 Click Apply. Previous (page 1087) | Next (page 1091)

Place the Lower C-channels We now place c-channel members along the bottom lines, so that the bottom of the c-channel is flush with the ends of the rectangular tubing. 1 Select the four lower lines as shown in the image.

Place the Lower C-channels | 1091

2 Click the radio button to move the orientation indicator, as shown.

1092 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

3 Click Apply. Previous (page 1090) | Next (page 1094)

Place the Lower C-channels | 1093

Place the Horizontal tube Place a tube across the remaining horizontal line. 1 Select the remaining horizontal line.

1094 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Rectangular) from the Family menu. 3 Select 250x150x10 from the Size menu.

Place the Horizontal tube | 1095

4 Select 90.00 deg from the Angle menu. 5 Click the radio button to move the orientation indicator.

6 Click Apply. Previous (page 1091) | Next (page 1097)

1096 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Place the Angle Braces Only one more selection set and we are finished with component placement. We place the angle braces using the sketch lines. 1 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Square) from the Family menu. 2 Select 80x80x6.3 from the Size menu. 3 Ensure that the orientation indicator is on the center radio button, the horizontal and vertical offsets are set to 0.00 mm, and the angle is 90.00 deg. 4 Select the two angular lines.

Place the Angle Braces | 1097

5 Click Apply. 6 Click Cancel to close the Insert dialog box.. Previous (page 1094) | Next (page 1098)

Lengthen Profile The c-channel on top of the taller vertical members must extend to the outside edges of the tubes (plus an additional 15 mm on each end to allow for a fillet weld). 1 Zoom in on the model, as shown (upper portion of one of the tall vertical members).

1098 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤

Lengthen/Shorten

.

3 In the Lengthen - Shorten Frame Member dialog box, click Both Ends.

4 Select the c-channel. We know the rectangular tube is 150 mm wide and that the c-channel currently extends to the center of the tubes. Therefore, the extension distance is (150/2) + (15) = 90. 5 Enter 90 mm in the Extension field. 6 Click Apply. The program adds 90 mm to both ends of the c-channel.

7 Click Cancel.

Lengthen Profile | 1099

Previous (page 1097) | Next (page 1100)

Notch Profile Next, we fit the tube within the c-channel using the Notch command.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Notch

.

2 Select the tube, as shown. The first selection is the component to cut. The second selection is the cutting tool.

The other member selection command activates automatically. 3 Select the c-channel to use as the cutting tool. 4 Click Apply.

1100 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Repeat these steps for the notch cut on the other vertical member at the opposite end of the c-channel. 6 Click Cancel. 7 To see the notches clearly, turn off the visibility of the c-channel. In the Model browser, right-click the c-channel, and then remove the check mark next to Visibility.

8 Turn on the Visibility of the c-channel when finished. Previous (page 1098) | Next (page 1102)

Notch Profile | 1101

Create Miter Joints Now, create miter joints between the shorter vertical tubes and the horizontal tube.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Miter

.

2 Select the first and second tube as shown.

3 Orient the model view as shown in the following image to see how the miter options affect the miter joint.

1102 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

NOTE The visibility of the tube in the background has been turned off for clarity.

Previous (page 1100) | Next (page 1103)

Change Miter Joint Options We now try different miter options and use the one that best fits our design. 1 To create a clearance for a groove weld and see the two miter types, enter 5 mm in the Miter Cut Extension field. Miter Cut at both sides is selected by default. As the name implies, this option adds or removes material on both components equally.

Change Miter Joint Options | 1103

2 Click Apply.

The total offset distance between the mitered faces is 5 mm. 3 To continue experimenting with the miter options, select Miter Cut at one side.

4 Select the lower tube, and then select the upper tube.

1104 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Click Apply. The joint is offset 5 mm, but only the lower tube is offset from the joint midplane.

6 This time, select the upper tube first, and then the lower tube. 7 Click Apply. The first component selected is the component offset from the joint midplane.

Change Miter Joint Options | 1105

8 Create another miter joint at the other tube junction. 9 Click Cancel when finished. Previous (page 1102) | Next (page 1106)

Remove End Treatments For this exercise, assume that the miter joints you created previously are incorrect and must be recreated. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Remove End

Treatments panel.

1106 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

. This command is located in the expanded Frame

2 Select the horizontal tube, and then click Apply. The program removes the miter joints and restores the tubes to their original, unmodified state.

3 Click Cancel.

4 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Miter and then re-create the miter.

,

NOTE The miter offset type is not important for this example.

Remove End Treatments | 1107

Previous (page 1103) | Next (page 1108)

Re-create Miter Joint Re-create the second miter.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Miter and create the miter shown.

1108 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

,

2 Click Cancel when finished. Previous (page 1106) | Next (page 1109)

Trim Profile Next, we remove the excess material from the lower c-channels. 1 Orient the model view as shown. NOTE The visibility of the tube in the background has been turned off for clarity.

Trim Profile | 1109

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Trim to Frame

. 3 First, select the trimming component, which is the tube.

1110 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

4 Select the component to trim, which is the c-channel.

Trim Profile | 1111

5 Click Apply.

1112 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

6 Use the same method to trim the other c-channel. You can repeat these steps to trim the c-channels at the other three junctions, but it is not required for this exercise. 7 Close the Trim to Frame dialog box when finished. Previous (page 1108) | Next (page 1114)

Trim Profile | 1113

Cut Profile Now, remove the excess material from the angle braces using existing faces as the cutting plane. 1 Orient the model view as shown.

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Trim/Extend

. 3 First, select the component to cut, which is the square tube.

1114 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

4 Click the Face command, and then select the cutting face.

5 Click Apply. If desired, you can set the view to Wireframe display, and orbit the model to more clearly see the cut results. Return to Shaded display when finished.

Cut Profile | 1115

In the remaining steps, we cut the other side of the tube using the same method. 6 Select the tube, click the Face command, and then select the face, as shown.

1116 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

7 Click Apply.

8 Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Previous (page 1109) | Next (page 1117)

Profile Information Use the Frame Member Info command to view characteristics of a frame component. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Frame Member

Info

. This command is located in the expanded Frame panel.

2 Select a frame member.

Profile Information | 1117

The dialog box populates with the information on the selected component. The Select command remains active, and you can select a different component to return information on that component. 3 Click Done when finished. Previous (page 1114) | Next (page 1118)

Change Profile Use the Change command to make various edits to a selected component. The Change command uses the same dialog box as the Insert Frame Members command and allows modification of any of the properties in the dialog box.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Change . 2 Select the longer square tube. 3 Select 90x90x6.3 from the Size menu. Leave all other settings at the default values. NOTE You can use the Multi-Select Profiles option located at the lower right of the dialog box to select and modify multiple components in one execution. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Yes in the Frame Generator message box. 6 Click OK in the Frame Member Naming dialog box. The cuts on the tube are preserved. Previous (page 1117) | Next (page 1118)

Load Calculation You can use the Beam/Column Calculator to determine how loads affect the design.

1118 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Beam/Column

Calculator

to access the command.

The Beam/Column Calculator command is not used in this tutorial. Previous (page 1118) | Next (page 1119)

Refresh You can publish your own frame shapes to Content Center or modify existing Content Center families and templates. Use the Refresh command to update existing frames after the Content Center has been modified.

On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Refresh access the command.

to

The Refresh command is not used in this tutorial. Previous (page 1118) | Next (page 1119)

Modify the Skeleton The frame components are associative to the skeletal sketches. We modify the sketches in frame_generator.ipt to see how this change affects the frame members. 1 Edit frame_generator:1.

Refresh | 1119

2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel

➤ Parameters

.

3 Change the value for base_L to 3000 mm. 4 Click Done. 5 Return to the assembly. The frame components, including the various joints and cuts, update to match the change.

1120 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

6 Close the assembly. Previous (page 1119) | Next (page 1121)

Hybrid Skeleton In this exercise, we start a new assembly and place a component that contains a solid and unconsumed sketches. This component is used as the skeleton for our frame. We use Frame Generator to add frame members around the solid and sketches. 1 Create a new, blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iam template. 2 Place frame_generator_hybrid.ipt into the assembly.

Hybrid Skeleton | 1121

This skeletal model consists of a solid feature and unconsumed sketches. 3 Change the display from Shaded to Wireframe. Previous (page 1119) | Next (page 1122)

Insert Profile - Insert Frame Members We now insert frame members around the existing geometry. First, select the profile to use for the frame members. 1 Save the assembly. Use frame-hybrid.iam for the file name. 2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Insert Frame

. 3 Select DIN from the Standard menu.

1122 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

4 Select DIN 59 370 S Angle Steel from the Family menu. 5 Select S 40 x 5 from the Size menu. 6 Select Steel from the Material menu. Previous (page 1121) | Next (page 1123)

Insert Profile - Select Geometry Now we select the geometry to position the lower and upper frame members. For the lower frame members: 1 Select the four lower edges. Ensure that the first selection matches the image, as indicated by the cursor.

2 Set the orientation indicator as shown.

Insert Profile - Select Geometry | 1123

3 Select 0.00 deg in the Angle field. The design intent is that the inside surfaces of the L-channels are flush with the solid. Since the channels are 5 mm thick, they must be offset 5 mm. 4 Enter -5 mm in the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields.

1124 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Click Apply. The Create New Frame dialog box appears. 6 Click OK. For the upper frame members. 1 Select the four upper edges. Ensure that you select the left end of the first line, as shown.

2 Click Apply. 3 Change the graphics display to the Shaded visual style.

Insert Profile - Select Geometry | 1125

1126 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Previous (page 1122) | Next (page 1127)

Insert Profile - Position First Vertical Member Next, we position the first vertical member. 1 Select the vertical edge.

2 Select 270.00 deg from the Angle menu. 3 Orient the model view as shown.

Insert Profile - Position First Vertical Member | 1127

The inside surfaces of the channel must be flush with the outer surfaces of the existing channels. 4 Enter -10 mm in the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields.

1128 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Click Apply. NOTE Since the orientation of the channels for each vertical edges is different, we place the channels one at a time. Previous (page 1123) | Next (page 1129)

Insert Profile - Position Remaining Vertical Members Repeat these steps for the remaining vertical edges: 1 Select an edge. 2 Use the Angle field to adjust the orientation of the frame member, as needed. 3 Click Apply. 4 Click Cancel when all vertical members have been inserted.

Insert Profile - Position Remaining Vertical Members | 1129

Previous (page 1127) | Next (page 1130)

Lengthen Profile In our design, the vertical members must be flush with the upper and lower channels. We must lengthen the vertical members to meet this criteria. 1 Orient the model view, as shown.

1130 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤

Lengthen/Shorten

.

3 Select the vertical channel. Make the selection near the top of the channel. NOTE When you lengthen one end of a component, the end closest to your cursor when you select the component is the end that is lengthened. 4 Ensure the One End command is selected.

Currently, the end of the vertical channel is flush with the inner surfaces of the upper channels. The width of the channels is 40 mm. Therefore, the extension distance is 35 mm. 5 Enter 35 mm in the Extension field. 6 Click Apply.

Lengthen Profile | 1131

7 Repeat this process for the other end of the vertical channel, this time using 5 mm for the lengthen distance. 8 Repeat this process for the upper ends of the remaining three channels. It is not necessary to adjust the lower ends of the remaining channels. 9 Close the dialog box when finished. Previous (page 1129) | Next (page 1132)

Create Miter Joint Next, we create a miter joint. Since the channels have a radius on the inner corner, we offset the miter to provide relief for the radius. 1 Orient the model view, as shown. This view is the top of the model.

1132 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Miter

.

3 Select the two channels.

Create Miter Joint | 1133

4 Ensure Miter Cut at both sides the Miter Cut Extension field. 5 Click Apply.

1134 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

is selected. Enter 2 mm in

6 You can repeat this process for the remaining seven junctions, but it is not required for this tutorial. 7 Close the dialog box when finished. Previous (page 1130) | Next (page 1135)

Insert Profile - Place Other Members Now, we use the sketches to place the other members of the frame. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Insert Frame

. 2 Select DIN EN 10219-2 (Circular Hollow Section - Cold Formed) from the Family menu. 3 Select 26.9x3 from the Size menu. 4 Enter -3 mm in the Vertical Offset field.

Insert Profile - Place Other Members | 1135

5 Enter 0 in the Horizontal Offset field. 6 Select 90.00 deg from the Angle menu. 7 Set the orientation indicator, as shown in the following image.

8 Select the five sketch segments as shown. NOTE Depending on where you select on the first element, you may need to adjust the orientation and angle to match the preview in the image.

1136 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

9 Click Apply.

Insert Profile - Place Other Members | 1137

Previous (page 1132) | Next (page 1138)

Insert Profile - Add Support Members Now we insert the support members. 1 Select the line as shown.

1138 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 Select 270.00 deg from the Angle menu. 3 Click Apply. 4 Select the remaining line. 5 Set the orientation indicator as shown.

Insert Profile - Add Support Members | 1139

6 Click OK.

Previous (page 1135) | Next (page 1141)

1140 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Cut Profile - Trim Tubing Next, we trim the round tubing. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Trim/Extend

. 2 Select the four tubes, as shown.

3 In the Trim - Extend To Face dialog box, click the Face command, and then select the face as shown.

Cut Profile - Trim Tubing | 1141

4 Click OK. The tubes are trimmed to the selected face. Previous (page 1138) | Next (page 1142)

Lengthen Profile First, we must lengthen the support tubes so we can notch them to meet the other tubes. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤

Lengthen/Shorten 2 Select the tube as shown.

1142 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

.

3 Enter 6 mm in the Extension field. 4 Click OK.

Lengthen Profile | 1143

Previous (page 1141) | Next (page 1145)

1144 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Notch Profile Now that the support tubes extend past the other tubes, we can notch the supports to fit the mating tubes.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Notch . 2 Select the component to notch, which is the lower tube.

Notch Profile | 1145

3 Click the notching profile, which is the upper tube.

4 Click OK. The lower tube is notched to fit the upper tube.

1146 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Previous (page 1142) | Next (page 1147)

Insert Profile - Point To Point Next, we add angular braces. 1 Orient the model view as shown.

Insert Profile - Point To Point | 1147

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Insert Frame

. 3 Select DIN 59 370 S Angle Steel from the Family menu. 4 Select S 35 x 5 from the Size menu. 5 Select the Insert Members Between Points option.

6 Select the start point. This point is the corner vertex on the skeletal model.

1148 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

7 Select the end point.

Insert Profile - Point To Point | 1149

8 Set the orientation indicator, as shown.

Enter -5 mm in the Vertical Offset field.

1150 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

9 Enter 0.00 mm in the Horizontal Offset field. 10 Enter 0.00 deg in the Angle field. 11 Click Apply.

12 Use this procedure to add another brace on the other side. Change the value for the angle to 180.00 deg, and click the Mirror Frame Member command. 13 Click Cancel when finished. Previous (page 1145) | Next (page 1152)

Insert Profile - Point To Point | 1151

Cut Profile - Trim Supports Finally, we trim the supports to meet the vertical frame members. 1 Turn off the Visibility of frame_generator_hybrid:1, and then orient the model view as shown.

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Trim/Extend

. 3 Select the angular braces. 4 Click the Face command, and then select the cutting face.

1152 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Click Apply. 6 Select the angular braces again. 7 Click the Face command. 8 Select the cutting face.

Cut Profile - Trim Supports | 1153

9 Click Apply.

1154 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

10 If you like, you can repeat this procedure for the other end of the braces. Previous (page 1147) | Next (page 1155)

Summary In this tutorial, you learned how to: ■ Select and position frame components. ■

Trim excess material.

■

Create miter joints.

■

Create notched cuts.

Summary | 1155

■

Remove end treatments from a profile.

■

Replace components.

■

Work with both wire frame and hybrid skeletons.

Remember to check the Help files for further information.

1156 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Previous (page 1152)

Summary | 1157

1158

DWG Data 1

43

1159

About this tutorial

1160 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1

Part 1 - Create parts from DWG files. Category

Data Exchange

Time Required

10 minutes

Tutorial File Used

eBox2.dwg

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. Import two layers from a multiple layer DWG file to create a simple extruded part. Prerequisites ■ See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information. The imported layers contain the geometry and the dimensions that define the sketch you use to create the extruded part. Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one.

Open a New Part File Next, import the DWG data into an Autodesk Inventor part file. You need a part file open in 2D Sketch mode. Open a new Part document: 1 Click the New icon , located at the top of the application window. Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next to the icon. 2 In the New File dialog box, click the English tab, and then double-click

the Standard (in).ipt template

.

Open a New Part File | 1161

The part opens in Sketch mode, where the 2D Sketch commands are available and the sketch grid displays, if turned on.

Import DWG Data 1

On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Insert panel ➤ ACAD . NOTE If a dialog box appears prompting you to choose a translator, select Translator: DWG and click the OK button.

2 Select eBox2.dwg, and then click Open. The Layers and Objects Import Options dialog box opens. 3 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to each layer, except the p and p dim layers. 4 Ensure All is selected in the Selection field. 5 Click the Next button to display the Import Destination Options dialog box. Activate the Constrain End Points and Apply geometric constraints check boxes at the lower-left of the dialog box. 6 Click Finish to close the dialog box. The program imports geometry and dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.

7 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbon, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu, to exit the sketch environment.

1162 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1

Previous (page 1161) | Next (page 1163)

Extrude Sketch Geometry 1 Press E on the keyboard, or right-click and select Extrude from the marking menu, to invoke the Extrude command. 2 Click inside the 4.25" x 4.25" square to satisfy the profile selection. This is the only portion of the sketch to be extruded.

Extrude Sketch Geometry | 1163

3 Drag the gold distance manipulator until the value 0.075 appears in the value input box. Alternatively, you can enter .075 directly in the box.

1164 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1

4 Click the green Ok button to create the extrusion and exit the command.

Previous (page 1162) | Next (page 1165)

Orient the Part 1 On the navigation toolbar in the graphics window, click Zoom

.

2 In the graphics window, click and drag the zoom indicator down the screen to zoom in on the extrusion.

Orient the Part | 1165

NOTE If your system zooms out when you drag down, it is likely that this option was selected during installation. You can easily change the zoom direction of the drag and mouse wheel (at any time): on the Display tab of the Application Options dialog box select the Reverse direction option. If you have been using AutoCAD for some time you may be more comfortable using the AutoCAD zoom direction preferences. 3 Click the following image to play the animation. 4 On the navigation toolbar, click Free Orbit

.

5 In the graphics window, click and drag inside the orbit indicator to orbit the part. 6 Right-click, and then select Done [Esc]. The exact position of the part is not important. 7 Press F6 to orient the part in the default home view. Previous (page 1163) | Next (page 1166)

Change the Part Appearance To change the part color: 1 Select a new appearance from Appearance drop-down menu. The menu is located on the Quick Access Toolbar at the top of the Autodesk Inventor window. 2 Select Blue (Sky) from the list of available part appearances. In the default Home (isometric) view, the part appearance looks dark. You can optionally orbit the part again using the technique just described to see how model position in relation to the lighting affects the appearance.

1166 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1

Previous (page 1165) | Next (page 1167)

Save the Part 1 Click Save

, located on the Quick Access Toolbar.

2 Name the file panel, and then click Save.

3 Click

➤ Close to close the file.

Previous (page 1166) | Next (page 1168)

Save the Part | 1167

Summary In this tutorial, you learned how to: ■ Use existing DWG geometry to define a sketch profile. ■

Use the sketch geometry to create an extruded part feature.

■

Orient the part using Zoom and Free Orbit.

■

Change part appearance.

■

Save the part.

■

Close the part file.

Use the skills you learned in this tutorial to create a more complex part in the next tutorial, DWG Data 2. Use the table of contents to the left to start the DWG Data 2 tutorial. Previous (page 1167) Click here to return to the tutorials home page

1168 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1

DWG Data 2

44

1169

About this tutorial

Part 2 - Create parts from DWG files. Category

Data Exchange

Time Required

15 minutes

1170 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

Tutorial File Used

eBox2.dwg

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. Import two different layers from the same DWG file. Create the cover for an electrical panel from the DWG geometry. This tutorial draws on skills you learned in part 1 of this tutorial set. The cover consists of a base extrusion, a fillet, and a shell. You use the existing geometry and dimensions from the DWG file to create the part features in Autodesk Inventor. Prerequisites ■ Complete Part 1 (DWG Data 1) of this tutorial set. ■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 1171)

Open Part and Access DWG 1 Open a new part file: ■

Click the New icon , located at the top of the application window. Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next to the icon.

■

In the Create New File dialog box, click the English folder, and then

double-click the Standard (in).ipt template

.

2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Insert panel ➤ ACAD

.

Open Part and Access DWG | 1171

NOTE If a dialog box appears prompting you to choose a translator, select Translator: DWG and click the OK button. Previous (page 1170) | Next (page 1172)

Import DWG 1 Select eBox2.dwg, and then click Open. The Layers and Objects Import Options dialog box opens. 2 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to the p and p dim layers, and then check the c and c dim layers. 3 Ensure All is selected in the Selection field. 4 Click the Next button to display the Import Destination Options dialog box. If not already enabled, activate the Constrain End Points and Apply geometric constraints check boxes at the lower-left of the dialog box. 5 Click the Finish button to close the dialog box. The program imports the geometry and dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.

1172 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

6 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbon, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu, to exit the sketch environment. NOTE Finishing a sketch automatically switches the display to the Home (isometric) view. Restore the front view of the sketch by clicking Front on the View Cube at the upper-right of the display screen.

Previous (page 1171) | Next (page 1173)

Extrude Sketch Geometry 1 Press E on the keyboard to invoke the Extrude command, or right-click and select Extrude from the marking menu. The "front" view of the inserted DWG file contains geometry which represents the outside of the cover and the thickness of the material that makes the cover sides. To create this part, you select both of the regions displayed in the front view inside of the 6.30" x 6.30" rectangle. Notice that you must click inside both sketch loops. Click to play the animation which shows the selections needed. 2 In the value input box in the in-canvas display, or the Extents field of the Extrude dialog box, highlight the 1 in value.

3 Select the .560 dimension value (the full depth of the cover) in the "top" view of the inserted geometry.

Extrude Sketch Geometry | 1173

4 The program replaces the default extrude distance of 1 inch by the existing dimension, as represented by the parameter name d5.

5 Click the green Ok button to create the base feature that will become the electrical panel cover and exit the command. 6 Press F6 to position the part in the Home view.

1174 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

Previous (page 1172) | Next (page 1176)

Extrude Sketch Geometry | 1175

Create a Round Next, you create the rounded edge on the outside of the cover. You reference existing dimensions to determine the radius for the round, just as you did to create the base extrusion. 1 In the Model browser, click the expand/collapse symbol next to Extrusion1.

2 Right-click Sketch1 to display a menu of commands that apply to the current selection, and then select Visibility. 3 Select Zoom All from the Navigation toolbar. Zoom All is also located on the Navigate panel of the View tab. The imported sketch is visible and ready for reference in the graphics window.

1176 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

4 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet

. You can also right-click and select Fillet from the marking menu. 5 Select the edge loop on the front of the cover (the edge opposite the face with the sketch).

Create a Round | 1177

The round previews in the graphics window.

6 Highlight the default Radius value in the value input box in the in-canvas display, or in the Fillet dialog box. Select the .110 dimension value found on the lower left corner of the front view of the sketch geometry.

1178 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

7 Click the green Ok button to create the round and exit the command.

Create a Round | 1179

Previous (page 1173) | Next (page 1181)

1180 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

Create a Shell 1 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Shell . 2 Use Orbit to approximate the view shown in the following image. The exact orientation is not important.

Create a Shell | 1181

3 Use the Shell command to hollow out the model while maintaining a specified wall thickness. You can remove faces of the model that will be open after completing the command. 4 Select the face with the sketch.

1182 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

5 Using the dimension-referencing technique you learned previously, highlight the default value in the Thickness field of the Shell dialog box, and select the dimension value .060 located in the top view of the sketch geometry to set the material thickness.

Create a Shell | 1183

6 Click OK to create the shell and exit the command.

1184 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

Notice that because you created the round before the shell, the program creates the inner fillet automatically as part of the shell operation.

Create a Shell | 1185

7 In the Model browser, right-click the Sketch1 browser node and remove the check mark next to Visibility to turn off the display of the sketch. 8 Save the part, using cover_panel for the file name. 9 Close the part. Previous (page 1176) | Next (page 1186)

Summary In this tutorial, you learned how to: ■ Import layer-specific DWG data into an Autodesk Inventor sketch. Then create an Autodesk Inventor solid model of the ACAD drawing views using the actual DWG geometry and dimensional values. ■

Add round and shell features to an extrusion.

■

Use and refer to the imported DWG data to determine feature dimensions.

■

Use the Autodesk InventorOrbit command to make the selection of geometry easier during feature modeling.

■

Use Autodesk Inventor marking and context menus to access commands that apply to the current selection.

■

Use the Visibility option on browser objects to ease your design process.

1186 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

Previous (page 1181)

Summary | 1187

1188

DWG Data 3

45

About this tutorial

1189

Part 3 - Create parts from DWG files. Category

Data Exchange

Time Required

15 minutes

Tutorial File Used

Start a new assembly document

Create the box portion of the electrical panel within the context of the assembly. Use specific layers of the supplied 2D DWG file to define the Inventor solid part geometry. At the assembly level, insert the panel and cover parts you created earlier. Use assembly constraints to position the parts relative to one another. This tutorial draws on the skills you learned in parts 1 and 2 of this tutorial set. Objectives ■ Create part models in the context of an assembly. ■

Use layers of a DWG file to define your part geometry.

■

Insert parts into an assembly.

■

Position parts relative to one another with assembly constraints.

Prerequisites ■ Complete Parts 1 and 2 of this tutorial set. ■

Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with the various view tools.

■

See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one.

1190 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Next (page 1191)

Create New Assembly File 1 Ensure that your active project is tutorial_files. 2 Click the New icon located at the top of the application window. Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next to the icon 3 In the New File dialog box, click the English tab, and then double-click

the Standard (in).iam template. You now have a new, empty assembly. Previous (page 1189) | Next (page 1192)

Create New Assembly File | 1191

Create In-place Component 1 To begin creating the electrical box in the empty assembly, right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and then select Create Component from the marking menu. The Create In-Place Component dialog box opens. 2 In the New Component Name field, type box.

3 Next to the Templates menu, click Browse Templates , then select the English tab, and double-click the Standard (in).ipt template. 4 Click OK in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. NOTE Although this tutorial (and the previous two tutorials) required you to select the English tab, you usually select a new template from the templates displayed on the Default tab when creating new files. 5 Before Autodesk Inventor can create the empty part file where you create your electrical box, you must select a plane in the assembly. The plane is coincident to the sketch plane of the part. Often, a planar part face exists in the assembly on which you want to create your part. However, in this tutorial the assembly is empty, and you select an origin plane. Notice that the cursor changes and the program prompts you to Select sketch plane for base feature. 6 To select an origin plane (that is not currently visible), click the expand/collapse symbol next to the assembly Origin folder to expand the folder. TIP The origin folder for the assembly is located at the top of the browser, just under the Representations folder.

7 Select the XY Plane. This selection aligns the new part origin with the assembly origin in your empty assembly file. Once you select the origin plane, the program creates and names the part document. The assembly browser updates to show the new part and

1192 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

that you are working within the sketch of the newly created box part file. The sketch commands are active and you can begin to define the geometry for the first extrusion. 8 If necessary, click the Front face of the View Cube to set the sketch plane parallel to the screen.

Previous (page 1191) | Next (page 1193)

Insert DWG Data 1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Insert panel ➤ ACAD

.

Insert DWG Data | 1193

NOTE If a dialog box appears prompting you to choose a translator, select Translator: DWG and click the OK button. 2 Select eBox2.dwg, and then click Open. The Layers and Objects Import Options dialog box opens. 3 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to the c and c dim layers, and then check the b and b dim layers. 4 Ensure that All is selected in the Selection field. 5 Click Finish. The program imports the geometry and dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.

NOTE The colors of your sketch lines could be different from the image. Differences in color are not important for this tutorial. Previous (page 1192) | Next (page 1194)

Extrude Geometry 1 Press E on the keyboard to activate the Extrude dialog box.

1194 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Like the previous tutorial, you must select each of the regions inside the 6 x 6 rectangle. In this case, there are three. 2 To make the selection of the first region easier, click Zoom Window

located on the navigation bar in the graphics window. Then drag a zoom window around the area to magnify. Click the following image to play an animation that shows using Zoom Window and making the proper selections.

3 After you make the selections, click Zoom All within the graphics window.

to fit all geometry

As with the previous tutorials, you use an existing sketch dimension as the distance of the extrusion being created. 4 In the Extents field of the Extrude dialog box, or from the value input box in the in-canvas display, highlight the 1 in value, and then select the 4.00 dimension from the top view displayed in the sketch window.

5 Click Ok to create a solid extrusion 4 inches deep. 6 If necessary, press F6 to position the part in the default home view as shown.

Extrude Geometry | 1195

Previous (page 1193) | Next (page 1196)

Create Rounds Next, you create rounds on the two edge loops of the front and back faces. As before, you refer to dimensions contained in the imported sketch to determine the size of the rounds. 1 In the browser, expand the part feature named Extrusion1. 2 Right-click Sketch1, and then select Visibility.

3 Click the Zoom All

1196 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

.

4 Click the Fillet command on the ribbon select Fillet from the marking menu.

, or right-click and

5 Select the front edge loop of the cover (the edge opposite the face with the sketch).

Create Rounds | 1197

The round previews in the graphics window.

6 Highlight the Radius value in the Fillet dialog box, or in the value input box in the in-canvas display, and select the 0.110 radius value that was defined by the designer who originally created the DWG drawing.

1198 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

7 Click Ok to create the round.

Previous (page 1194) | Next (page 1199)

Create Shell Like the cover part, this part must be hollowed out, or shelled. However, unlike the cover part, you do not remove any faces from the part during the shell operation. 1 Click the Shell command. 2 Highlight the default value in the Thickness field. 3 Select the 0.060 wall thickness value in the right-side view of the sketch, which is still displayed in the graphics window.

Create Shell | 1199

4 Click OK to create the shell. Because the shell removed only interior material, there is no apparent change to the part.

1200 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

5 Save the part. Previous (page 1196) | Next (page 1201)

Create Cut Extrusion Next, you use the imported sketch to remove material from the part. 1 Use the View Cube to change your view so that the sketch is visible.

Create Cut Extrusion | 1201

2 Click the Extrude command , and then click inside the inner loop of the sketch. The preview indicates the current extrude distance.

1202 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

3 In the Extents field of the Extrude dialog box, select To Next from the drop-down menu. If you are using the mini-toolbar, select To next face/body from the drop-down menu. 4 In the Extrude dialog box, or from the mini-toolbar, click Cut.

Create Cut Extrusion | 1203

Within the selected region of the box part, you should see a direction indicator pointing to the inside of the box. The indicator shows the direction of the cut extrusion. Though dim, the direction indicator is visible in the highlighted portion of the image.

5 To see the indicator more clearly, click the Flip Direction button in the dialog box, or from the mini-toolbar.

1204 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

6 Click the other Flip Direction button. Ensure the indicator points to the inside of the box.

Create Cut Extrusion | 1205

7 Click OK to create the cut. Because you selected To Next from the Extents menu, or To next face/body from the mini-toolbar, the cut terminates on the next face it encounters. In this case, it is the back face of the box.

1206 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

8 In the browser, right-click Sketch1 (nested under Extrusion1), and then remove the check mark next to Visibility.

Create Cut Extrusion | 1207

9 Save the part. Previous (page 1199) | Next (page 1208)

Assembly Environment 1 In the Return section of the tab, click Return . This action returns you to the top-level assembly environment from the part environment. Assembly commands replace the part commands. It is within this assembly environment that you add and constrain the panel and cover parts that you created earlier.

1208 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

2 Before you continue, save the assembly. Use eBox for the file name, and then click Save. If prompted to save eBox.iam and its dependents, click OK. Previous (page 1201) | Next (page 1209)

Show Origin Planes The panel and cover that you created in the first two tutorials will be placed relative to faces on the box you created. They will also be place relative to the assembly origin planes (which are not currently displayed). 1 Hold down the Ctrl key, and click the YZ and XZ origin plane browser nodes so that they are both selected. The planes highlight in the graphics window. Click the following image to play an animation that illustrate how the planes will highlight. 2 With both planes selected, right-click one of the planes in the browser, and then select Visibility. The planes are now visible in the graphics window.

Show Origin Planes | 1209

You use these planes to attach, or constrain, the panel and cover parts to the box part. NOTE Your origin planes could be a different color. Previous (page 1208) | Next (page 1210)

Add Parts Next, you add the panel and cover parts you created in the first two tutorials to the assembly. 1 In a blank area of the graphics window, right-click, and then select Place Component from the marking menu. NOTE Do not right-click over the box which would invoke the context menu for a selected component.

1210 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

The Place Component dialog box displays. You are viewing the contents of the Tutorial Files folder. 2 Find and select the panel part you created in the first tutorial, and then click Open. 3 The panel is attached to your cursor. Click anywhere in the blank space around the existing box part to place one occurrence of the panel. Do not attempt to place the panel within the box.

After you click, notice that another occurrence of the panel is attached to the cursor and ready for placement. 4 Since you only need one occurrence of the panel, press Esc to end the Place operation. 5 Use the previous steps to find and place one occurrence of the cover part you created in the second tutorial.

Add Parts | 1211

Previous (page 1209) | Next (page 1212)

Unconstrained Parts You placed the panel and cover parts; however, they are not in their final positions. You use assembly constraints to locate the parts with respect to one another. Typically, you need three constraints to position a part. Currently, the panel and cover parts are unconstrained and are free to move in 3D space. Click and drag the cover part. Notice that the part moves with your cursor, and the part remains at whatever location you release the mouse. Click in the following image to play an animation that shows dragging the cover part within the assembly. Previous (page 1210) | Next (page 1213)

1212 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Grounded Parts Now, attempt to drag the box part. This part does not move, and your cursor changes to the push-pin, grounded symbol. Autodesk Inventor always grounds the first part placed into an assembly to provide a fixed, foundational part to which you can constrain other parts. You can specify that any part is grounded or not grounded. You can also specify that the first part placed is not grounded. But the best practice is to select a strategic, foundational part for the first part placed, and then leave it grounded. Previous (page 1212) | Next (page 1213)

Constrain the Panel Part - Display Planes As you become proficient with solid modeling, you learn that having your part geometry oriented relative to your file origin provides certain benefits during assembly. The supplied 2D DWG drawing was created so that the geometry is symmetrical about the sketch origin point when inserted into the Autodesk Inventor sketch The origin point is the X-Y 0, 0 coordinate. You take advantage of the origin planes of each part as you position the parts using assembly constraints. Display these planes now. 1 In the browser, expand the Panel part, and then expand the Origin folder nested under the Panel part. 2 Use the technique used earlier to Ctrl-click the YZ Plane and XZ Plane. Right-click the browser node for one of the planes, and select Visibility to display the planes in the graphics window. Click in the following image to play an animation that shows the results of displaying the panel origin planes. TIP As you proceed, your view angle of the assembly should approximate that of the previous image. Orbit the part as needed. 3 Right-click anywhere in the blank space of the graphics window. Ensure that you do not click on one of the parts. Then, select Constraint from the assembly marking menu. The Place Constraint dialog box activates. Previous (page 1213) | Next (page 1214)

Grounded Parts | 1213

Constrain the Panel Part - First Constraint The Place Constraint command provides several different constraint types. The Mate constraint is selected by default when the command is activated and is suitable for all the constraints needed in this tutorial.

Any constraint type requires that you select geometry on two parts. In the next step, you place a mate constraint between the top face of the panel part and the inside back face of the box part. 1 Click in the following image to watch the animation, and then select the face of the panel, as shown. The selected face highlights and the direction indicator shows the constraint vector. 2 Click the following image to watch the next animation and then select the inside back face of the box part as shown. By default, Place Constraint previews the constraint automatically. It is only a preview and the constraint is not yet complete. 3 In the Offset field of the Place Constraint dialog box, change the default value to 1 in to move the panel 1 inch away from the inside back face. 4 To finalize the constraint, click Apply. The mate constraint is created and the panel is offset one inch from the back of the box. The Place Constraint command remains active and ready for the next constraint set. Previous (page 1213) | Next (page 1214)

Constrain the Panel Part - Second Constraint The Mate constraint type is also needed for the next selection set; however, you use the Flush solution type to modify the constraint. The Flush solution points the constraint vectors of each selection in the same direction, rather than in opposition. 1 In the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box, click Flush.

1214 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

2 In the graphics window, select the YZ plane of the panel (click the following image to watch an animation of this selection). 3 Select the YZ plane of the assembly (click the following image to watch an animation of this selection). 4 Click Apply to create the constraint. NOTE In the constraint that you created, no physical geometry existed for either selection. It is important to consider the part and assembly origin geometry when creating your part models and when constraining them in assemblies. Parts should be created symmetrical about the origin when it makes sense. Otherwise a principal face should be coincident with one of the origin planes. Use care when selecting the first part placed into an assembly and its position relative to the assembly origin. Previous (page 1214) | Next (page 1215)

Constrain the Panel Part- Third Constraint The panel needs one more constraint to finalize its position. In this next selection set, you select the XZ plane of the assembly and the XZ plane of the panel. 1 In the browser, select the XZ Plane, nested under the assembly origin folder. The plane highlights in the graphics window (click the following image to watch an animation of this selection). 2 In the browser, select the XZ Plane, nested under the origin folder for the panel part (click the following image to watch an animation of this selection). NOTE Since work features, such as workplanes, are abstract geometry and you are not selecting a specific face, you can select them in the browser. Note the direction vectors on each plane. If the direction vectors are pointing in the same direction, you can place a Flush constraint. However, in this case, the direction vectors are pointing towards each other so you must change the solution type to Mate before you apply the constraint.

Constrain the Panel Part- Third Constraint | 1215

3 Select Mate in the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box.

Click the following illustration to see how the constraint previews. 4 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box. The panel is now fully positioned. Previous (page 1214) | Next (page 1216)

Constrain the Cover Part - Place Constraint Finally, you constrain the cover part to the box. This process is nearly identical to the steps you took to constrain the panel part. 1 In the browser, expand the origin folder nested under the cover part. 2 Ctrl-click YZ Plane and XZ Plane, right-click the text for one of the planes, and then select Visibility.

1216 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

3 Press C on the keyboard to activate the Place Constraint dialog box. NOTE Using the keyboard is often a more comfortable method of invoking commands for users who are transitioning from AutoCAD. 4 Select the face of the box, as shown.

Constrain the Cover Part - Place Constraint | 1217

5 Select the inside face of the cover. Click the following illustration to see how the constraint previews. 6 Click Apply to create the constraint. The inside face of the cover is mated to the outside face of the box.

1218 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Previous (page 1215) | Next (page 1219)

Constrain the Cover Part - Finish Placement Next, you finish placement of the cover. 1 In the browser, select the YZ plane nested under the origin folder for the assembly. The plane highlights in the graphics window.

Constrain the Cover Part - Finish Placement | 1219

2 In the browser, select the YZ plane for the cover. 3 Click Apply.

1220 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Previous (page 1216) | Next (page 1221)

Final Constraint - Mate or Flush? Sometimes, when using origin planes to position a part, you know that your final constraint will need to be either a mate or a flush. It is important to observe the selection vector previews to determine if you want your arrows pointing towards each other (mate) or pointing in the same direction (flush). 1 In the browser, select the XZ plane in the origin folder for the assembly. Then, select the XZ plane in the origin folder for the cover. TIP When the expected preview of the constraint does not happen try reversing the constraint solution.

Final Constraint - Mate or Flush? | 1221

2 Click Flush in the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box. The constraint now previews (click the following illustration to see the preview). 3 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box. The cover is fully positioned. Previous (page 1219) | Next (page 1222)

View the Assembly 1 To return the work planes to an invisible state, on the ribbon select View tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Object Visibility, and select All Workfeatures from the drop-down menu.

2 Save the assembly. When prompted to save ebox.iam and its dependents, click OK.

1222 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

3 Click the View Face command , located on the navigation toolbar, and then select the front face of the cover. It makes that face parallel with the screen. 4 Click View tab ➤ Appearance panel ➤ Visual Style, and select

Wireframe from the drop-down menu

.

NOTE Autodesk Inventor defaults to the Shaded display visual style. Wireframe, Wireframe with Hidden Edges and others are optional visual styles. 5 If you like, you can now compare this front view of the Autodesk Inventor assembly to the front view in the 2D drawing in the original DWG file. The geometry in the two files should be identical.

View the Assembly | 1223

Previous (page 1221) | Next (page 1224)

Summary In this tutorial, you learned how to: ■ Build upon the skills you learned in the previous tutorials in this set by importing, using, and referring to DWG geometry in part sketches and part features. ■

Create a part within the context of an assembly.

■

Insert parts into an assembly.

■

Position parts in the assembly using assembly constraints.

■

Use origin geometry to constrain parts in an assembly.

■

Display and undisplay origin geometry to aid in the clarity of your assembly.

■

Change the display of your assembly from shaded to wireframe display for optional visual inspection of part positions.

The next logical step in the workflow suggested by this set of tutorials would be to document your design with an Autodesk Inventor drawing. You can use the table of contents to the left to start the Drawings tutorial and learn how to prepare final drawings. These tutorials focused on using existing DWG geometry to build a set of three simple parts and to put them together in an assembly. To increase your general familiarity and comfort with Autodesk Inventor, you may find it useful to work through some, or all, of the other tutorials. To access the tutorials from the ribbon, select Get Started > Learn about Inventor > Tutorials.

1224 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Previous (page 1222)

Summary | 1225

1226

46

Alias to Inventor

About this tutorial

Translate an Alias file to an Inventor part file and explore the association. Category

Data Exchange

Time Required

20 minutes

Tutorial File Used

Keyboard.wire (original) Keyboard.ipt Keyboard.wire (revised)

1227

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. In this tutorial, you open an Autodesk Alias wire file and translate it as an Inventor part (.ipt) file in Autodesk Inventor. You also reassociate an edited Alias wire file to create an updated Inventor part file. Envision an engineering environment in which a standard keyboard design was created as a surface model by an industrial designer using Alias. The Alias geometry is translated into Autodesk Inventor and becomes an Inventor part file (.ipt). Additional design enhancements are made to the keyboard part file using Autodesk Inventor modeling commands. Meanwhile, the industrial designer continues to modify the Alias design into a more organic, ergonomic shape. Because there is direct associativity between Alias and Autodesk Inventor, the part file is easily updated to reflect the new ergonomic design when the modifications to the Alias surface model are complete. Objectives ■ Derive and exclude surfaces. ■

Import individual surfaces.

■

Update surface associations.

■

Open an Autodesk Alias wire file and translate it directly in Autodesk Inventor as an Inventor part (.ipt) file.

■

Re-associate an edited Alias wire file to create an updated Inventor part file.

Prerequisites ■ Have a basic understanding of the Derived Part functionality. ■

Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with the various viewing tools.

NOTE You do not need Alias to complete this tutorial. Navigation Tips ■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 1229)

1228 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

Translate the Alias Wire File 1 Set your active project to tutorial_files. 2 Use the Open command to select Alias Files (*.wire) from the Files of type drop-down list. 3 Navigate to C:\Program Files\Audodesk\Inventor 2011\Tutorial Files\Keyboard\Original, and select Keyboard.wire from the file list. 4 Click Options to display the Alias Import Options dialog box. Make sure that the Associative Import radio button is active. 5 Click OK. 6 Next, click Open to open the Alias wire file. You may experience a slight delay as the wire file is translated directly into Autodesk Inventor and the Derived Alias dialog box displays.

Translate the Alias Wire File | 1229

Observe that four node names appear in the dialog box: Body, Keys, Logo, and Tools. The layer icon appears just to the left of the four node names because they represent the layer names of the surfaces which were in Alias.

1230 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

The top three commands in the Status area at the top of the dialog box remain inactive until you select one of the nodes from the list. Use these commands to select the layer as a composite surface or all surfaces individually. You can also exclude some (or all) surfaces. Use the + command at the far left to derive all the surfaces as a composite surface. It is the default condition. A composite surface appears in yellow and can be stitched into a solid. Most of the Autodesk Inventor modeling commands, like Shell or Split, can then be performed on the stitched solid. Use the middle command \ to exclude selected surfaces from the yellow composite surface. Excluded surfaces appear translucent. Use the command at the far right to import objects as individual surfaces. Individual surfaces appear in blue. 7 Expand the Logo node to display the eight surfaces that comprise the letters of the Autodesk logo. Click the + command to the left of the logo name. Observe that the icon changes to \ indicating that all eight surfaces are excluded from the composite surface. The logo does not appear in the keyboard model.

Translate the Alias Wire File | 1231

8 Click OK to close the dialog box. The translated Alias file now appears in the graphics window as an Autodesk Inventor part file comprised entirely of surface features.

1232 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

Take a moment now to examine the Model browser. The Keyboard.wire node represents the associative import of the Alias wire file. Expanding the Keyboard.wire node reveals the three composite surface features (Keys, Tools, and Body) that were translated into Autodesk Inventor. The composite names match the native Alias layer names.

Translate the Alias Wire File | 1233

NOTE Observe that the Logo surfaces do not appear under the Keyboard.wire node because they were excluded previously in this procedure. 9 Close the file without saving it. Previous (page 1227) | Next (page 1234)

Update the Inventor Part 1 Use the Open command to select Autodesk Inventor Files (*.iam, *.idw, *.dwg, *.ipt, *.ipn) from the Files of type drop-down list. 2 Go up one folder level to C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor 2011\Tutorial Files\Keyboard, and select Keyboard.ipt from the file list. Click Open to open the part file. 3 The completed keyboard part file appears in the graphics window. Rotate the part to view the features.

1234 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

The Model browser lists the operations that were performed on the part file after it was translated into Autodesk Inventor. Observe that the out-of-date icon appears in front of the Keyboard.wire node in the browser.

Update the Inventor Part | 1235

This icon indicates that the original Alias wire file was edited since it was initially translated into Autodesk Inventor. Now the Autodesk Inventor part file is no longer in sync.

4 Click Update on the Quick Access toolbar to load the newer version of the Alias file. After a short delay as the wire file loads, the Update Part Document dialog box displays several error messages. Several features that existed in the original Alias wire file are now missing from the revised Alias wire file. 5 Click Accept to close the Update Part Document dialog box.

1236 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

The Keyboard.wire node appears in a red font in the Model browser indicating that the Alias wire file and the Autodesk Inventor part file are no longer associated correctly.

6 Right-click the Keyboard.wire node in the Model browser, and select Update Associations from the pop-up context menu. There is a delay while the data is translated. When complete, the Update Associations dialog box appears. NOTE Two translucent views now appear in the graphics window. The view on the left contains the information that is in the wire file. The view on the right shows the updated information in Autodesk Inventor.

Update the Inventor Part | 1237

The Tools layer name appears in the drop-down list at the top of the Update Associations dialog box.

The dialog box has two lists and a color legend that appears below the two lists. Do not be alarmed if the colors in the color legend differ slightly from the colors that appear on your screen. It is because the color legend is based on the Autodesk Inventor color scheme in use.

1238 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

The list at the left displays the surface names from Alias. The corresponding Autodesk Inventor surface names appear on the right. From left to right, the four status buttons at the bottom are labeled Matched, Orphaned, Updated, and Deleted. Observe from the Keyboard Part File list on the right that surfaces Cavity_3_Bottom and Cavity_3_Sides are orphaned. The two surfaces no longer exist in the Autodesk Inventor part file after the original Alias wire file was edited. Orphaned surface names always appear at the top of the list on the right. These surfaces must be deleted. NOTE There are several ways that you can delete these two surfaces. You can select them individually, or you can hold the Ctrl key and pick them both. Once the surfaces are selected, click the X at the top right of the dialog box to delete. Alternatively, you can right-click and select Delete from the context menu when the surface names are highlighted. 7 Delete Cavity_3_Bottom and Cavity_3_Sides from the Part File list on the right. The deleted surface names now appear in a different color in the list. You can observe the identical color change in the graphics window. 8 Next, select the Body layer from the layer name drop-down list at the top of the dialog box.

Update the Inventor Part | 1239

Observe that four surfaces from the Alias Body layer are orphaned. In this instance, the surfaces still exist in the two models but they have changed significantly and must be matched. 9 To match the orphaned surfaces, select Body_Fillet_A from the Body Import File list on the left. Then, select Body_Fillet_A from the Body Part File list on the right. Now click the Match command = located just to the right of the layer drop-down list. NOTE You can also match the two surfaces by right-clicking and selecting Match from the context menu when the surface names are highlighted. The two surface names in the file lists change color and also appear in this same color in the graphics window. 10 Repeat the matching process with Body_Fillet_B and the other two surfaces. Make sure to select = (the Match command) after each pair of surface names are selected from the lists. 11 After all four surfaces are matched, click OK to exit the Update Associations dialog box. There is a slight delay as the associations between the surfaces are updated. When complete, the Autodesk Inventor part file appears in the graphics window reflecting the changes that were made in the edited Alias wire file.

1240 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

The Update Associations dialog box also appears stating that Stitch Surface4 cannot be built. This error message appears because the two surfaces that were used to create Stitch Surface4 (Cavity_3_Bottom and Cavity_3_Sides) were deleted. 12 Click Accept to close the Update Associations dialog box. 13 Expand the Sculpt1 node in the Model browser and observe the icon next to Stitch Surface4.

Update the Inventor Part | 1241

14 Although not necessary, you can right-click over this node and select Delete from the pop-up context menu if you want to remove it from the Model browser. To remove the icon next to the Sculpt1 node, right-click over Sculpt1 and select Edit Feature from the pop-up context menu. When the Sculpt dialog box appears, click OK to close the dialog box and rebuild the Sculpt feature. 15 As an optional step, move the End of Part marker above Move Body3 in the Model browser to view the revised keyboard in an unexploded representation.

16 Do not save Keyboard.ipt. Previous (page 1229) | Next (page 1242)

Summary In this tutorial, you learned how to open and translate an Alias wire file directly into Autodesk Inventor. Procedures to update the part file after changes are made to the Alias file were also provided to illustrate the associativity between Alias wire files and Autodesk Inventor part files. Some key points of this exercise include: ■ Deriving and excluding surfaces ■

Deleting orphaned surfaces

■

Matching one surface to another

1242 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

■

Deleting a stitched surface

■

Rebuilding a sculpted feature

Previous (page 1234)

Summary | 1243

1244

Index A animations tutorials

N 630, 636

B bearings tutorials 878 bolted connections tutorials 784

C compression springs tutorials 906 constraints tutorials 36 Content Center tutorials 332, 502

navigating SteeringWheels ViewCube 20

20

P parameters tutorials 370 Positional representations tutorials 636 projects tutorials 2

S

I

shafts tutorials 820 sheet metal tutorials 951 Skeletal Modeling (top-down design) 650 sketch constraints tutorials 36 sketches constraints 36 spur gears tutorials 846 SteeringWheels 20 substitutions Level of Detail representations

Inventor Studio tutorials 630, 636

T

D disc cams tutorials

892

F Frame Generator tutorials 1076

L Level of Detail representations tutorials 537

537

Top-Down Design 650 tutorials animation 630 bearings 878

1245 | Index

bolted connections 784 compression springs 906 Content Center 332, 502 disc cams 892 Frame Generator 1076 Inventor Studio 630 Level of Detail representations 537 parameters 370 positional representations 636 projects 2 shafts 820 sheet metal parts 951

1246 | Index

skeletal modeling 650 sketch constraints 36 spur gears 846 SteeringWheels and ViewCube V-belts 864

V V-belts tutorials 864 ViewCube 20

20